JP2017035550A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing dishonest acts.SOLUTION: A game board 30 of a pachinko machine comprises various kinds of ball entry means such as a general winning hole 31, and various kinds of ball entry detection switches such as a winning hole switch 221 for detecting a game ball(s) which entered the ball entry means. The winning hole switch 221 and the like is coupled to a main control device, the winning hole switch and the like outputs a first level signal during non-detection time of the game ball(s), and outputs a second level signal during detection time of the game ball(s). Then the main control device monitors periodically, the signal level of the signal input from the winning hole switch 221 and the like, and determines presence/absence of the ball entry to the general winning hole 31 and the like on the basis of the signal level. In addition, the main control device measures a period since a time when it is determined that prescribed ball entry occurs, until a prescribed momentum by an abnormality monitoring timer, and performs presence/absence of abnormality on the basis of the lapsed time. If any abnormality is detected, the main control device notifies a game hall concerned person of the abnormality by notification means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, in the game area where the launched game balls are guided, various entrance means for entering the game balls are provided. Each of these entrance means is provided with an entrance detection switch for detecting entrance of a game ball. And when the detection signal output from the entrance detection switch is input to the main control device, the main control device performs various controls relating to the game based on these detection signals.

  For example, when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance means, the main control device transmits a payout command corresponding to the detection result to the payout control device. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to predetermined ball entry means are paid out to the player.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not a big hit state is to be generated, and when a win result is obtained, a big hit state advantageous to the player is generated. When the big hit state occurs, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls by putting the game ball into the big hitting means.

  As a general entrance detection switch, a number of proximity switches that are non-contact type and excellent in durability are employed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  The proximity switch detects passage of the game ball by detecting a change in magnetic flux accompanying the passage of the game ball.

  More specifically, the proximity switch has a passage hole through which a game ball passes, a detection coil disposed around the passage hole, and a high-frequency oscillation circuit connected to the detection coil. When the game ball passes through the passage hole, an induced current flows through the metal game ball due to electromagnetic induction. In this case, the oscillation amplitude, the oscillation frequency, and the like change in the high-frequency oscillation circuit due to changes in the inductance and loss of the detection coil. By detecting this with the detection circuit, the passage of the game ball can be detected in a non-contact manner. A signal detected by the detection circuit is output to the outside through an output circuit including a comparator.

  Under the above configuration, in a normal state where the game ball does not pass through the passage hole, a low level signal is output from the output terminal of the proximity switch, while on the other hand, when the game ball passes through the passage hole, the high level is output. A signal is output. The main control device can detect that the game ball has passed by detecting the change in the signal level.

  For example, when the game ball passes through the passage hole of the proximity switch, the oscillation amplitude, oscillation frequency, etc. of the high-frequency oscillation circuit change during the passage of the game ball (time TS1 to TS2) as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34B, the output level from the output terminal is switched from the low level (L) to the high level (H).

JP 2000-107396 A

  However, when such a proximity switch is used as a ball detection switch, the magnetic field around the detection coil changes due to the influence of external radio waves, and the game ball passes even though the game ball does not pass. May be falsely detected. For this reason, there has been a risk that a fraudulent act of intentionally causing the proximity switch to malfunction, that is, a so-called “radio wave” is performed using a device that transmits radio waves.

  For example, for a proximity switch (entrance detection switch) that detects the entry of a game ball, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), the call is transmitted while the game ball is passing (time TS1 to TS2). By inserting radio waves having a short time (time TK1 to TK2), the output level of the proximity switch becomes a low level (L) during the time TK1 to TK2, as shown in FIG. In other words, the signal level is switched twice while the game ball is passing (time TS1 to TS2), and in fact, there is one game ball that has entered the ball entry means. It can be erroneously detected that there was a ball.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraud.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
Entry means arranged in the game area;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising control means for monitoring the signal output from the entrance detection means and performing predetermined control,
The incoming ball detection means continuously outputs a first level signal during non-detection of a game ball, and continuously outputs a second level signal during detection of a game ball,
The control means includes
A signal monitoring means for periodically monitoring the signal level input from the entrance detection means;
Based on the switching of the signal level input from the entrance detection means, at least entrance determination means capable of determining that a game ball has entered the entrance means,
An elapsed time measuring means capable of measuring an elapsed time from the time when there is an entry by the entry determining means to a predetermined opportunity;
An abnormality determining means capable of determining the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality based on the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means;
The gist of the present invention is that it is provided with notifying means capable of notifying that there is a predetermined abnormality based on the abnormality determination by the abnormality determining means.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is an excellent effect that fraud can be suppressed.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection structure of a winning opening switch and a main controller. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd opportunity corresponding | compatible opening passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows various table structures. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an opportunity corresponding unit control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of an off symbol counter. It is explanatory drawing which shows a table structure. (A) is a timing chart for demonstrating the output signal from a winning opening switch, (b) is a timing chart for demonstrating the input signal to CPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating abnormality determination processing etc. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the change of the magnetic field etc. in a proximity switch, (b) is a timing chart for demonstrating the output signal from a proximity switch. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the change of the magnetic field etc. of a proximity switch (entrance detection switch) at the time of fraud, (b) is for demonstrating the output signal from the proximity switch at that time It is a timing chart. It is a front view showing composition of an inner frame concerning the 2nd embodiment, a game board, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the 2nd mode determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the 1st mode determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st display control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination | determination information setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity corresponding | compatible unit control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of the sub control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the command which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference in the structure of the various hit types which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference of the structure of various open | release types which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus control process which concerns on another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process which concerns on another embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203, and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. .

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the lower center, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 protruding toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as launching device) 70 as launching means described later while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launch rail that guides the launch device 70 and the game ball immediately after being launched from the launch device 70. 61 is attached. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is adopted as the firing device 70.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a first opportunity corresponding unit (operating port) 33, a second opportunity corresponding port 34, a variable display device unit 35, etc. in through holes formed by router processing. The game board 30 is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, it is detected by various detection switches described later, and the upper plate 19 (or lower) A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  The first opportunity corresponding unit 33 includes an upper winning opening 33a and a lower winning opening 33b, and a pair of opening / closing members 33c corresponding to the lower winning opening 33b. As a result, the upper winning opening 33a is in an open state in which a game ball can always enter, whereas the lower winning opening 33b is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 33c according to the establishment of a predetermined condition. There is a switch between a closed state where the ball cannot enter and an open state where the game ball can enter. For example, the lower winning opening 33b is when the opening / closing member 33c is in the open state in the normal mode and a specified time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or when a specified number (for example, 1) of game balls have entered. Closed. This opening / closing process is performed only once in the normal mode. Instead of the above configuration, the lower winning opening 33b may be switched between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state.

  The variable display device unit 35 receives a prize for the normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays with the passage of the second opportunity corresponding port 34 as a trigger, and the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning port 33a or lower winning port 33b). A special display device 43 that performs variable display as a trigger and a decorative symbol display device 42 that performs variable display in accordance with the variable display by the special display device 43 are provided.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured so that “O” or “X” can be lit and displayed as a normal symbol, and each time the game ball passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed from “O” to “ Switching display (fluctuation display) is performed at high speed such as “×” → “◯” →. When the change display is stopped for a few seconds with the “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is activated for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when the game ball newly passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display performed at that time. It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The special display device 43 is provided on the right side of the normal symbol display device 41, and is composed of three-color light emitting diodes (three-color LEDs) having red, green, and blue emission colors. Then, each time the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, a color change display (variable display) is performed, and the lighting mode (lighting color) when the variable display stops determines whether or not it is a big hit. Is displayed.

  More specifically, when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, the special display device 43 displays the three-color LED at a high speed such as red → green → blue → red →. When a predetermined time elapses, it is determined and displayed in one of the colors. High-speed color change display means, for example, that red, green, and blue are displayed in order every 4 msec. In the case of winning the big hit lottery, at this time, it is determined and displayed in red or green (for example, stopped for several seconds), and a special gaming state occurs. In particular, red is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a high probability mode described later, and green is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a time reduction mode described later. The display content of the special display device 43 is also directly controlled by the main control device 261.

  Further, when a new game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 during the variable display of the special display device 43, the corresponding variable display is performed after the end of the variable display at that time. It has a configuration. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 46. Yes. In addition, when a new game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on a command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the special display device 43, Display is performed by the display control device 45. On the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower are displayed. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each symbol sequence, and then the upper symbol sequence → the lower symbol sequence → the middle symbol sequence. Stops are displayed in order. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won in the case of a big hit (occurrence of a special game state). Specifically, the passage of a specified time (for example, 29 seconds) or a specified number (for example, 10) of winnings is regarded as one round (special prize state), and the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Opened.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail constituting part 51 and an outer rail constituting part 52, and a rail 50 for guiding a game ball launched from the launching device 70 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, the parallel part of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 is excluded.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the front frame set 14, a ball passage 71 is provided below the window portion 101 so as to connect to a discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15 from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later. In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the firing rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the rear side of the front frame set 14 has dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 15 is formed. Thus, if the game ball launched from the launching device 70 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is transferred to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, a passage leading to the upper plate 19, and a ball passage. 71 and the passage leading to the lower plate 15. A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion on the entrance side of the ball passage 71.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board mounting unit 701 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 corresponds to various winning ports such as a general winning port 31 as a winning means and detects a game ball that has entered the various winning holes (entrance detecting means). Is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is provided with first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b corresponding to the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b, respectively. Further, a second opportunity corresponding port switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the second opportunity corresponding port 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225 via a cable connector. It has been. The first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 through a cable connector.

  On the other hand, the first opportunity corresponding switches 224a and 224b that detect the entry into the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b) are directly connected via the connector cable without passing through the relay board. It is connected to the control device 261.

As will be described in detail later, the detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225).
Here, the configuration of various incoming ball detection switches will be described. In the present embodiment, as a prize opening switch 221, a count switch 223, first trigger corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, and a second trigger corresponding opening switch 225, a penetration type proximity switch that is conventionally used is employed.

  The penetration type proximity switch has a passage hole through which a game ball passes. A detection coil connected to a high-frequency oscillation circuit is disposed around the passage hole. When the game ball passes through the passage hole, an induced current flows through the metal game ball due to electromagnetic induction. In this case, the oscillation amplitude, the oscillation frequency, and the like change in the high-frequency oscillation circuit due to changes in the inductance and loss of the detection coil. By detecting this with the detection circuit, the passage of the game ball can be detected in a non-contact manner. A signal detected by the detection circuit is output to the outside through an output circuit including a comparator.

  Next, an electrical configuration relating to the above-described entrance detection switch and the main control device 261 will be described with reference to an example of the relationship with the winning opening switch 221 shown in the schematic block diagram of FIG. However, in FIG. 8, for the sake of convenience, the first board surface relay board that relays both of them is omitted.

  The award opening switch 221 formed of a through-type proximity switch as described above includes an input terminal 221a, an output terminal 221b, and a ground terminal 221c.

  The input terminal 221a of the prize opening switch 221 is connected to the power supply terminal 227 of the main controller 261 via a predetermined electric path 226 constituted by a cable connector, a first board surface relay board, or the like. As a result, +12 V power generated by the power supply device 313, which will be described later, is supplied to the winning opening switch 221 as the operating power.

  The output terminal 221b of the prize opening switch 221 is connected to the inverting circuit 229 of the main controller 261 via a predetermined electric path 228 constituted by a cable connector, a first board surface relay board, or the like. The inverting circuit 229 of the main control device 261 is connected to a CPU 501 described later. As a result, the output signal from the winning opening switch 221 is logically inverted by the inverting circuit 229 of the main controller 261 and input to the CPU 501.

  The ground terminal 221c of the prize opening switch 221 is electrically connected (grounded) to the ground level of the main controller 261 via a predetermined electrical path 230 constituted by a cable connector, a first board surface relay board, or the like. Although not shown, the CPU 501 (earth terminal) is naturally connected to the ground level. Here, the ground level refers to the entire electrical path that is at the reference potential of 0 V in the main controller 261.

  With the above configuration, a high level signal of + 12V is output from the output terminal 221b during normal times when the game ball does not pass through the through hole of the winning hole switch 221. On the other hand, when the game ball is passing through the passage hole, a low level signal having a reference potential of 0 V is output. Therefore, a low level signal is normally input to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 via the inverting circuit 229, and a high level signal is input when the passage of a game ball is detected.

  The reason why the winning opening switch 221 outputs a high level signal during normal time and outputs a low level signal during game ball detection is to prevent erroneous detection by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261.

  In a configuration in which a low level signal is output during normal time and a high level signal is output when a game ball is detected as in the prior art, noise is applied to the electrical path 228 between the winning port switch 221 and the main control device 261. There is a possibility that the CPU 501 may mistakenly recognize that a game ball has passed though it has been input to the main control device 261 as a high level signal, and the game ball has not actually passed through the prize opening switch 221. there were. Causes of noise include static electricity generated by various electronic devices, vibrations caused by the player shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 10, and the like.

  Furthermore, for example, the connector of the cable connector that connects the prize opening switch 221 and the main control device 261 is intentionally inserted or removed, or the connection state of the connector is loosened in advance, and vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 to Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of generating a high level signal by causing the male and female pins to collide with each other, the above configuration also has an effect of suppressing this.

  Although not described in detail, the relationship between the main controller 261 and other ball detection switches (count switch 223, first trigger corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, second trigger corresponding port switch 225) is also a prize opening. The configuration is the same as that of the switch 221.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid that opens the large winning opening in the variable winning apparatus 32, and a pair of opening / closing members is provided in the first opportunity corresponding unit 33. A lower winning opening solenoid that opens and closes 33c is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided in the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numeral is given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (such as a big hit state or a high probability state), the front frame set 14 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later, A terminal for outputting information relating to the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information relating to various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and the payout from the payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information on the number of winning balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate mounting unit 701. Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate mounting unit 701), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported on the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It has been.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

  Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power Is input.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 70). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 261 (main board) of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by normal processing (see FIG. 11), and on the contrary, returning of each value written to the backup area 503a includes turning on the power (including turning on the power due to power failure cancellation). The same processing is performed in the main process (see FIG. 10). Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) of FIG. 16 is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, a special display device 43, a normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, for convenience, illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted, but the input / output port 505 includes a prize opening switch 221, a count switch 223, first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, a second opportunity corresponding opening switch 225, and the like. Various detection switches and various electrical components such as various substrates are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. In addition to a RAM 553 that is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input / output port 554, a bus line 555, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are also provided. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, various illumination units, and lamps 102 to 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the sub control device 262. Then, display according to the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 25), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process at the time of turning on the power (see FIG. 25). . As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when it is returned to the front, and it is turned off when the received command is determined by a command determination process (see FIG. 27) described later.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 70, and the launch device 70 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that it is not done, the launching device 70 is driven, and the game ball is launched at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527 and analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526 ( Specifically, internal command generation for VDP 526 is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 16).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 performs lottery (big hit lottery) using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot random number counter C1 as a lottery random number counter used for the jackpot lottery and the mode determination used for determining the transition to the high probability mode or the low probability mode described later when the jackpot is won. The counter C2, the variation selection counter C3 used for determining the variation display time of the special display device 43, the initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation display time of the special display device 43 The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determining the normal symbol and the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 41 are used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for a variation pattern and reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display device 43 is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern (effect mode) are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area and a second reserved ball storage area as a storage area composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each area of the first reserved ball storage area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the first opportunity corresponding unit 33. It is designed to be stored. In addition, in each area of the second reserved ball storage area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34. Yes.

  In detail, each jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 676, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 676) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. The configuration is back to Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upward winning port 33a or lower winning port 33b) is stored in the first reserved ball of the RAM 503. Stored in the area. There are two types of jackpot random numbers, a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode, etc.) and a high probability state (high probability mode). The number of random number values to be 2 is “337, 673”, the number of random number values that are jackpots in the high probability state is 10, and the value is “67, 131, 199, 269,337,401,463,523,601,661 ".

  Here, various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, the game mode (game state) is switched between a normal mode (normal state) and a plurality of specific modes that are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. More specifically, as the specific mode, two modes, a high probability mode and a time reduction mode, are set. Among these, the high probability mode is a game mode that continues until the next jackpot, and the time reduction mode is a mode that shifts to the next mode after the predetermined period.

  The normal mode refers to a normal state that is not a specific mode such as the high probability mode. Therefore, in the normal mode, the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state) is a normal low probability.

  In addition, the high probability mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed with “red” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability variation symbol), and the subsequent big hit A state in which the probability is higher than that in the low probability state. In the following description, the case where the decorative symbol display device 42 is a jackpot due to the probability variation symbol is referred to as “probability variation jackpot”, and the case where the jackpot is due to a normal symbol other than the probability variation symbol is referred to as “normal jackpot”.

  In the high probability mode, the jackpot probability is increased and a high probability state is obtained. In addition, in this embodiment, (1) a state in which the variable display time in the special display device 43 is shortened (time shortening state). (2) A state in which the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, and (3) a specified time (opening time) related to the opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (lower winning award 33b) as compared with the normal mode. In the state where it is lengthened, or the prescribed number (winning number) is increased as compared with the normal mode, (4) when the winning result indicating that the symbol “○” is stopped on the normal symbol display device 41 is obtained. (5) Probability that the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the current number of times the opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is executed more times than in the normal mode) The probability) is a state of being higher than the winning probability of the normal mode is given. More specifically, in the high probability mode, the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is in an open state, and when a specified time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a specified number (for example, 3) of game balls enter. Closed when there is a ball. This opening / closing process is repeated twice. As a result, the bottom winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is frequently opened, and the big win lottery is continuously made, and the ball is well held. In addition to this, as a high probability mode, in addition to increasing the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state), any combination of the above configurations (1) to (5) (for example, (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and (4), (1) and (5), (2) and (3 ), (2) and (4), (2) and (5), (3) and (4), (3) and (5), (4) and (5), (1) and (2) (3), (1) and (2) and (4), (1) and (2) and (5), (1) and (3) and (4), (1) and (3) and (5 ), (1) and (4) and (5), (2) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (5), (2) and (4) and (5), (3), (4) and (5), (1), (2), (3) and (4), (1), (2), (3) and (5), (1) and (2 ) And (4) (5) can be employed (1) and (3) and (4) (5), and (2) and (3) and (4) (5)). Note that, according to the states (2) to (5), the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time at the lower winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is higher than the ratio in the normal mode. That is, such a state corresponds to the high ball entering state in the present embodiment. Therefore, the high probability mode can be paraphrased as a high probability, a time reduction, and a high pitching mode. On the other hand, a state that is not in the states (2) to (5) as in the normal mode corresponds to a low entry state.

  In addition, the time reduction mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed in “green” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a normal symbol other than a predetermined probability variation symbol). Thereafter, the game mode is set while the variable display of the special display device 43 is performed 100 times, which means a state more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. In the time shortening mode, the jackpot probability is as low as that in the normal mode, and the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time at the lower winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is higher than the ratio in the normal mode. It is a high game mode. In the present embodiment, the states (1) to (5) given in the high probability mode are given in the same manner. That is, except for the difference in jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state), the same state (time shortening state and high pitching state) is obtained. Of course, as in the high probability mode, any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) can be adopted. Therefore, the time shortening mode can be restated as a low probability / time shortening / high pitching mode.

  For example, the mode determination counter C2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), the mode determination counter C2 returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the mode determination counter C2 determines whether or not to shift to the high probability mode after the big hit. Specifically, if the counter value is an odd number such as “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, the transition to the high probability mode is determined, and if the counter value is an even number such as “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”. In this case, the transition to the time reduction mode is determined. Although the term “transition” is used here, the high probability mode is continued if the counter value is odd when originally in the high probability mode, and the counter value is even when originally in the time reduction mode. If so, the time shortening mode is continued. The mode determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the mode determination counter C2 is stored in the mode determination counter buffer. The value of the mode determination counter C2 stored in the mode determination counter buffer is the first reserved ball in the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upward winning port 33a or lower winning port 33b). Stored in the storage area.

  Further, the variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. In this embodiment, after the reach is generated with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped, and the last stop after the occurrence of reach is also performed. “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol and “completely disengagement” where reach does not occur are selected by lottery. For example, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear outreach and C3 = 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. The reach lottery may be individually set according to the state of the lottery probability, the number of starting reserved balls at the start of change, and the like. The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is the first reserved ball in the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a or lower winning opening 33b). Stored in the storage area.

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 240) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. This is also shown in FIG. The first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type (reach pattern) of decorative symbols, such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final after the reach has occurred. A more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops is determined. Accordingly, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when “big hit” occurs, one of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected, and when “out-of-front reach” occurs, normal reach and super reach are selected. When either one is selected and “reach other than front / rear out” occurs, normal reach is selected. In addition, in the case of “completely off”, none of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the big hit random number counter C1, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 250) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right second opportunity corresponding port 34. Is done. Normally, there are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. On the other hand, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, that is, in the case where the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is in the high pitching state, there are 224, and the range is “5-228”. That is, the probability of stopping the symbol “◯” in the normal symbol display device 41 is higher than that in the normal mode. When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning (in this example, “◯”) is stopped and displayed. Then, the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is activated for a predetermined time. Further, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, the time until the lottery result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (variable display time of the normal symbol) is shortened. The ratio at which the unit 33 is in a high entrance state increases. As a result, the bottom winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is frequently opened, and lottery lottery is continuously performed.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 12, first, in step S301, various incoming ball detection switch reading processes are executed. As will be described in detail later, here, the state of various ball detection switches connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information is stored.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, 676, 9 respectively. , 238, 250) is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is executed, and in step S305, a second opportunity corresponding port passing process accompanying the passing of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 is performed. Run. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the switch reading process in step S301 will be described in detail. In this switch reading process, each ball detection switch (winning port switch 221, count switch 223, first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, second opportunity corresponding port switch 225) is individually monitored and individually received. Similar processing is performed. Therefore, the switch reading process related to the winning opening switch 221 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 13 as an example, but the same process as the process shown in FIG.

  First, in step S401, the signal level of the input signal from the winning opening switch 221 is checked. The function of this processing constitutes the signal monitoring means in this embodiment.

  For example, when the game ball is not passing through the passage hole of the winning opening switch 221, a high level signal (H) of + 12V is output from the winning opening switch 221 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32A), and main control is performed. On the device 261 side, a low level signal (L) having a reference potential of 0 V is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32B). FIG. 32A is a timing chart for explaining an output signal from the winning opening switch 221, and FIG. 32B is a timing chart for explaining an input signal to the CPU 501.

  On the other hand, while a game ball enters the general winning port 31 and the game ball is passing through the passage hole of the winning port switch 221, a low level signal (L) is output from the winning port switch 221 [ In the main controller 261 side, the high level signal (H) is input to the CPU 501 via the inverting circuit 229 (see timings t2 and t3 in FIG. 32B).

  In the subsequent step S402, the signal level checked in step S401 is stored in the signal level buffer for the winning opening switch 221 provided in the work area of the RAM 503.

  In addition, the signal level buffer is provided corresponding to each ball detection switch (award opening switch 221, count switch 223, first trigger corresponding unit switches 224 a and 224 b, second trigger corresponding opening switch 225), The signal level for each entrance detection switch is stored. The signal level buffer corresponds to the level storage means in this embodiment.

  The signal level buffer is configured by a ring buffer. What is a ring buffer conceptually? Is the start address and end address in the buffer area ring-shaped? Thus, the buffer is controlled so that writing is performed in order from the top address using the two address pointers of the write pointer and the read pointer, and when the final address is reached, the write back to the top address can be performed again. After data is written at a predetermined address position indicated by the write pointer, the value of the write pointer is updated to a value indicating the next address. Similarly, after data is read from a predetermined address position indicated by the read pointer, the value of the read pointer is updated to a value indicating the next address.

  In addition, the latest 200 msec data, that is, 100 cycles of data is stored in the ring buffer that constitutes each signal level buffer of this embodiment, and the oldest data beyond this is erased in order. Yes. Further, the position of the read pointer indicates a predetermined address position where the latest data is stored. As described later, the data for the past plural times is read based on the position of the read pointer. .

  Returning to the description of step S402, each time the signal level is checked at a cycle of 2 msec, the logical value corresponding to the signal level is sequentially written in the predetermined address position indicated by the write pointer in the signal level buffer for the winning prize switch 221. To go. Here, when the signal level of the input signal to the CPU 501 is “H (high)”, a logical value “1” is stored as level information indicating this, and the signal level is “L (low)”. Stores a logical value “0” as level information indicating this.

  In step S403, when the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set by looking at the setting status of an abnormality monitoring timer CT described later (for example, a value of a setting flag that can determine whether or not the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set), The abnormality monitoring timer CT is subtracted. As will be described later, 1000 msec is initially set in the abnormality monitoring timer CT, and each time this process is performed, the value is subtracted by 2 msec. On the other hand, if the abnormality monitoring timer CT is not set, the process proceeds to the next process as it is. The abnormality monitoring timer CT constitutes elapsed time measuring means in the present embodiment.

  In step S404, a calculation process, which is a pre-process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 31, is performed.

  More specifically, logical inversion processing is performed on the earliest data (oldest data) of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer, and the earliest data that has been logically inverted and the remaining 2 data. Calculate the logical product of all the batch data. Then, this value is temporarily stored in the work area of the RAM 503. The function of this processing constitutes the logic inversion means and the logical product calculation means in this embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the logical values of the signal levels stored at timings t1, t2, and t3 are “0”, “1”, and “1”, the logical inversion of the earliest data When processing is performed, the earliest data is “1”. Therefore, the logical product of this data and the other two data is “1”.

  In subsequent step S405, it is determined whether or not the logical product value calculated in step S404 is "1". Here, when the logical product value is “1”, it means that the signal level has been switched from “L” to “H”. In step S406, “1” is set to the value of the ball entry determination flag for the prize opening switch 221 (general winning opening 31), and the process proceeds to step S408. In addition, the entrance discrimination flag is a discriminator for discriminating whether or not there is an entrance and is provided corresponding to each entrance detection switch. In the start winning process in step S304 and the second opportunity corresponding port passing process in step S305, the presence / absence of a ball is determined based on this.

  On the other hand, if the logical product value is “0” in step S405, the signal level remains “L” or “H” for the past 4 msec, or the signal level is “H”. This means that the game has been switched from “L” to “L” and the like, so that it is determined that there is no entry to the general winning opening 31 and “0” is set to the value of the entering determination flag for the winning opening switch 221 in step S407. Then, the process proceeds to step S413. The function of the series of processes (entrance determination process) in steps S404 to S407 described above constitutes the entrance determination unit in the present embodiment.

  In step S408, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is 964 msec or more. As will be described later, the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set to 1000 msec when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31. That is, in step S408, the time has elapsed from the first time point t5 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31 to the second time point t7 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning port 31 next. It is determined whether or not the time TL3 is 36 msec or less (see FIG. 33).

  As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the time TL1 required for a game ball (a pachinko ball having a diameter of 11.0 mm) to freely fall and pass through a passing hole such as the prize opening switch 221 is 8 msec to 30 msec at the latest. Degree. Even if two game balls enter the general winning opening 31 or the like so that two game balls are connected, the detection start time t7 of the game ball entered secondly from the end t6 of the detection of the game ball entered first t7 It takes a time TL2 of 28 msec or longer. Accordingly, the time TL3 elapsed from the first time point t5 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning port 31 to the second time point t7 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning port 31 is 36 msec. In the following cases, there is a high possibility that the “radio wave” as described in the “problem to be solved by the invention” has been performed.

  However, even when an abnormality is detected such that the game ball entry interval (time TL3) is 36 msec or less, if the number of times of detection is small (for example, only once), it is not an illegal act. There may be a possibility of an accident due to noise or the like. On the other hand, if a large number of such abnormalities are detected, there is a high possibility of fraud. The “36 msec” corresponds to the specified time (first specified time) in the present embodiment. Note that the numerical value of 36 msec is arbitrarily set, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a value capable of discriminating an abnormality caused by the “radio wave”.

  Therefore, if it is determined in step S408 that the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is 964 msec or more, 1 is added to the value of the abnormality count counter provided in the work area of the RAM 503 in step S409, In step S410, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality count counter is 50 or more. The abnormality count counter is an abnormality number storage unit that adds and stores the number of times determined to be abnormal. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is less than 964 msec, the process proceeds to step S412 as it is. The function of the determination process in step S408 constitutes an abnormality determination unit in the present embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S410 that the value of the abnormality count counter is 50 or more, the first notification setting process is performed in step S411, and then the process proceeds to step S412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the abnormal count counter is less than 50, the process proceeds to step S412.

  In the first notification setting process in step S411, a setting process (notification process) for notifying that there is an abnormality is performed. For example, in the present embodiment, settings for outputting a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 to the sub-control device 262, settings for outputting an error signal to the hall computer of the game hall, and the like are performed. Based on this, in the external output process of the normal process described later, the command is output to the sub-control device 262, and the blinking control of the error display lamp 104 is performed by the sub-control device 262. The error display lamp 104, the external relay terminal plate 240 that outputs a ball entry error signal, and the like constitute notification means in the present embodiment.

  In step S412, the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set due to the current determination that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31. In this embodiment, 1000 msec which is the second specified time is set here. The numerical value of 1000 msec is arbitrarily set, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a value that can discriminate an abnormality caused by an “illegal large sphere” described later.

  Thereafter, in step S413, a detection end time determination process is performed to specify the end of detection of the game ball by the winning prize switch 221.

  Specifically, first of all, the latest data (newest data) of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer is logically inverted, and the latest logically inverted data and the remaining 2 Calculate the logical product of all the batch data. Then, this value is temporarily stored in the work area of the RAM 503.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the logical values of the signal levels stored at timings t2, t3, and t4 are “1”, “1”, and “0”, the logical inversion process of the latest data is performed. As a result, the latest data is “1”. Therefore, the logical product of this data and the other two data is “1”.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculated logical product value is “1”. Here, when the logical product value is “1”, it means that the signal level has been switched from “H” to “L”. “1” is set to the value of the end determination flag for (general winning opening 31). The end discrimination flag is a discriminator for discriminating the end of the entrance detection, and is provided corresponding to each entrance detection switch. And in the determination process of step S415 mentioned later, the time of completion | finish of a ball entry detection is discriminate | determined based on this. On the other hand, when the logical product value is “0”, the signal level remains “L” or “H” for the past 4 msec, or the signal level does not switch from “L” to “H”. “0” is set to the value of the end determination flag for the prize opening switch 221.

  In a succeeding step S414, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is less than 964 msec. That is, it is determined whether or not 36 msec has elapsed since it was determined that there was a ball entering the general winning opening 31.

  If it is determined that the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is less than 964 msec, it is determined in step S415 whether the value of the end determination flag is “1”. On the other hand, when the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is 964 msec or more, the process proceeds to step S417 as it is.

  When it is determined in step S415 that the value of the end determination flag is “1”, that is, when it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the winning hole switch 221 is ended, the value of the end determination flag is determined in step S416. Is set to “0”, and the setting of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is cancelled. Here, to cancel the setting of the abnormality monitoring timer CT, for example, the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is reset to an initial value (1000 msec in the present embodiment), or whether or not the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set is determined. This includes changing the value of a possible setting flag from “1” indicating presence of setting to “0” indicating no setting.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S415 that the value of the end determination flag is “0”, the process proceeds to step S417 as it is.

  In step S417, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not 1 second (1000 msec) has elapsed since it was determined that there was a ball entering the general winning award 31 under the condition where the abnormality monitoring timer CT was set. Here, if it is determined that one second has not elapsed, the present process is terminated as it is. If the method of resetting the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT to the initial value (for example, 0 msec) is adopted when canceling the setting of the abnormality monitoring timer CT in step S416, in step S417, for example, abnormality monitoring is performed. A configuration may be employed in which it is determined whether or not the value of the timer CT is “2” or less.

  “Radio Goto” includes, for example, legitimate acts such as the above-described fraud that separates the level signal that is output based on the detection of the game ball that actually passes through the prize opening switch 221 and the like and increases the number of detections. Using a game ball (11.0 mm in diameter) and a game ball (hereinafter referred to as “illegal large sphere”, eg, 11.8 mm in diameter) having a diameter larger than that of the winning hole switch 221 (for example, 11.4 mm in diameter). Is also possible. In such a case, an illegal large ball is first placed in the ball path in advance by, for example, winning a prize in the general winning opening 31. If it does so, the said illegal large ball will be in the state caught by the said passage hole, without passing the passage hole of the winning opening switch 221. FIG. Thereby, the winning opening switch 221 is always in an ON state (a state in which a low level signal is output) in which an illegal large ball is detected. In this state, by appropriately transmitting an improper radio wave that turns off the winning opening switch 221 (a state in which a high level signal is output), the on / off state is switched, and the game ball is not passing through even though the game ball is not passing. It can be erroneously detected that the ball has passed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the time TL1 required for the game ball to pass through the passing hole such as the prize opening switch 221 is about 8 msec to about 30 msec at the latest. In other words, if the high level signal continues to be output for one second or longer from the time when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31, it is possible that an illegal act by the illegal large ball is being performed. High nature.

  Therefore, when an affirmative determination is made in step S417, that is, when one second has elapsed from the time when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31, and the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT becomes “0”. In step S418, the second notification setting process is performed, and this process is terminated. The function of the determination process in step S417 constitutes an abnormality determination unit in the present embodiment.

  In the second notification setting process in step S418, a setting process for notifying that there is an abnormality is performed as in the first notification setting process (step S411).

  Next, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a or lower winning opening 33b) is determined by the value of the above described ball determination flag corresponding to the first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b. Determine based on. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, in the subsequent step S502, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). The process proceeds to step S503 on condition that there is a winning in the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 and the number N of starting reserved balls is smaller than 4, and the number N of starting reserved balls is incremented.

  In subsequent step S504, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 are used as the first free storage area in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Store in the area. Thereafter, the start winning process is temporarily terminated.

  Next, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 based on the value of the above-mentioned entrance determination flag corresponding to the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34, in the subsequent step S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of retained balls of the normal symbol display device 41 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine. The process proceeds to step S603 on the condition that there is a passage to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 and the number of reserved balls N <4, and the number of reserved balls N is incremented by one. In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process is temporarily ended.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S701, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S103, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S113 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S105 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S113. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S106, and in the subsequent step S107, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process also proceeds to step S113 in this case.

  In the process of step S113, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like that are the sub-side control devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S114 or the like). That is, in step S114, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S115, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S108, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S109, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared. In step S110, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S111, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed. Here are some more specific examples.

  For example, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been awarded to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 with reference to the various winning determination flags, and if there is a winning prize ball corresponding to the number corresponding to the winning prize. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Then, after the transmission of the command, the value of the corresponding entry discrimination flag is returned to “0”.

  Further, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

  Further, in the external output process, information for grasping the game state is output to the hall computer of the game hall in consideration of various discrimination information such as a jackpot flag, which will be described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

  For example, when a ball entry error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and there is no ball entry error. , An off signal is output.

  Further, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the decorative symbol variation, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are commands that are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect that matches the display performed on the special display device 43. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to display (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is set as the variation pattern command. In the high probability mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, “FD16” are set, and in the time reduction mode, “FE10”, “FE11”. , “FE12”, “FE13”, “FE14”, “FE15”, “FE16” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores a relationship between these variation pattern commands and decoration symbol variation types in a table (see FIG. 31). Then, the sub control device 262 executes the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, “FF11” is set in the normal mode, “FD11” is set in the high probability mode, and “FE11” is set in the time reduction mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is set to “20 seconds” in the normal mode, “8 seconds” in the high probability mode, and “10 seconds” in the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types (super reach SR1, SR2, SR3) of 30 second, 40 second, and 50 second patterns are prepared for the super reach in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of the super reach SR1, “FF12” in the normal mode, “FD12” in the high probability mode, and “FE12” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands. In the case of the super reach SR2, “FF13” in the normal mode, “FD13” in the high probability mode, and “FE13” in the time reduction mode are set. In the case of the super reach SR3, “FF14” in the normal mode, “FD14” in the high probability mode, and “FE14” in the time reduction mode are set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. In the premium reach of this embodiment, two types (premium reach PR1, PR2) of 60-second and 70-second patterns are prepared in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the premium reach PR1, “FF15” in the normal mode, “FD15” in the high probability mode, and “FE15” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern command. In the premium reach PR2, “FF16” in the normal mode, “FD16” in the high probability mode, and “FE16” in the time reduction mode are set.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to “complete out” that does not reach any reach state is set to “FF10” in the normal mode, “FD10” in the high probability mode, and “FE10” in the time reduction mode. The In the present embodiment, the variable display time that is completely off is set to 10 seconds in the normal mode. Of course, the variable display time in the high probability mode and the time shortening mode is shortened compared to the normal mode as in the normal reach.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation symbols, a normal symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a complete out symbol design combination. Five classifications are designated, which are the combinations. These divisions are indicated by “A1”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described.

  The combination of probability variation symbols is a combination of symbols composed of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 and “A1” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of probability variation symbols. Then, when “A1” indicating the probability variation symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 in the form of a slot. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of normal symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8, and “A2” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of normal symbols. Then, when “A2” indicating the normal symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “A3” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “A4” is set in the command. The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “A5” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols. As will be described in detail later, when “A3” to “A5” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. In the present embodiment, three commands “A3” to “A5” are prepared for the symbol command for detachment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration having only one symbol command for detachment may be used.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 11, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the special display device 43, and the jackpot determination and the decorative pattern variation pattern (effect pattern) in the decorative design display device 42 are performed. Settings are made. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when the big win state (special game state) is reached, the opening / closing process of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step S208, an opportunity handling unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is set as to what control is performed in the first opportunity handling unit 33.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly change The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Now, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember. Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 17, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made. The jackpot includes a jackpot state (special game state) and a predetermined time after the jackpot state ends.

  In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not color change display (variation display) is being performed by the special display device 43 by looking at the setting status of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not a big hit and is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S803, where it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is greater than zero. At this time, if it is a big hit or if the number N of starting reserved balls is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Further, if neither the big hit or the variable display is being displayed and if the number of starting reserved balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, 1 is subtracted from the number N of starting reserved balls. In step S805, processing for shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas on hold in the first holding ball storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S806, a variable display setting process is executed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time, and the numerical value 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the low probability state such as the normal mode as described above. Among them, “337, 673” is a winning value, and in the high probability mode, “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661” is a winning value. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S901: NO), that is, when it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot. In the present embodiment, the system is configured to shift to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode with a probability of 1/2 in the case of a big hit. Specifically, whether or not to shift to the high probability mode is determined based on the value of the mode determination counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. If the value of the stored mode determination counter C2 is an odd number “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” among the numerical values 0 to 9, the transition to the high probability mode is determined (probability large hit), and the even number “ If it is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 ", the transition to the time reduction mode is determined (usually a big hit).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot (step S902: YES), the jackpot variation pattern is determined in step S904, and the probability variation symbol (“A1” in the present embodiment) is set to the symbol command in step S905. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S902 that it is not a probable big hit (step S902: NO), that is, if it is a normal big hit, a big hit variation pattern is determined in step S907, and a normal symbol (this embodiment) is determined in step S908. Then, “A2”) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  In steps S904 and S907, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern command. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and the symbol variation mode of the decorative symbol is determined based on the values of the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2. . The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like for each game mode. . Note that the mode determination in the present embodiment is performed by a combination of an on / off state of a high probability state flag, a time shortening state flag, and a high entry state flag, which will be described later. For example, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitched state flag are all on (flag value “1”), it is determined that the mode is a high probability mode.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the big hit time during the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a normal mode big hit table as shown in FIG. That is, when CS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of CS2. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 0 to 69, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 70 to 149, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 150 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 197, 198 and CS2 = 0-120, “FF15” (premium reach PR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 197, 198 and CS2 = 121-240, “FF16” (premium reach PR2) is set in the variation pattern command.

  The symbol commands in step S905 and step S908 indicate the jackpot symbol in a predetermined section, and the sub controller 262 determines the stop symbol as will be described later. Specifically, when “A1” indicating the combination of probability variation symbols is set in the symbol command (step S905), the symbol combination of any one of the first, third, fifth, seventh, and ninth slots is sub-selected. The control device 262 determines the stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” indicating the combination of normal symbols is set in the symbol command (step S908), any combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is changed to the sub-control device 262. Is determined as a stop symbol. After the symbol command is set in step S905 and step S908, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S909, which is shifted when a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a reach is reached. This determination is made based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation selection counter C3 causes the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach to stop by shifting by one by one before and after the reach symbol, and the final stop after the occurrence of reach. “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol and “completely disengagement” where reach does not occur are selected by lottery. For example, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear outreach and C3 = 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. Here, when it is determined that it is reach (step S909: YES), the process proceeds to step S910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not reach (step S909: NO), that is, if it is “completely out”, a dislocation variation pattern is determined in step S915, and a complete out symbol is set as a symbol command in step S916. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S910, it is determined whether or not the front / rear reach is reached. If it is determined that the front / rear reach is out of step (step S910: YES), a deviation variation pattern is determined in step S911, the front / rear pattern is set as a symbol command in step S912, and the process proceeds to step S917. . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not front / rear detachment (step S910: NO), that is, when it is reach other than front / rear detachment, a detachment variation pattern is determined in step S913, and symbols other than front / rear detachment are determined in step S914. The command is set, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  When the outlier variation pattern is determined in steps S911, S913, and S915, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. And so on.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the time of front / rear detachment during the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a table for front / rear detachment during the normal mode as shown in FIG. That is, when CS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of CS2. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 0 to 90, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 91 to 170, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 171 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. At the time of reach other than forward / backward deviation (C3 = 2 to 21), the reach is normal regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and “FF11” is set in the variation pattern command. Further, at the time of complete deviation (C3 = 22 to 238), “FF10” is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  Further, the symbol command in step S912, step S914, and step S916 indicates a predetermined division of the combination of symbols that are out of the same manner as in step S905 and the like. Specifically, when “A3” indicating a combination of front and rear symbols is set as a symbol command (step S912), the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command stores it in the front and rear error symbol buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the front / rear out of reach is determined as the stop symbol. When “A4” indicating a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment is set in the symbol command (step S914), a combination of symbols corresponding to reach other than front / rear detachment stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear detachment of RAM 553 is selected. The sub-control device 262 determines the stop symbol. When “A5” indicating the combination of completely out of symbols is set in the symbol command (step S916), the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete out of the symbol stored in the complete out of symbol buffer of the RAM 553 is sub-control unit 262. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  In step S917, start setting processing is performed to indicate that a condition for performing color change display (variation display) is satisfied in the special display device 43. In this start setting process, a display timer setting process is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. For example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), it is set to 10000 msec. As will be described later, the display timer is decremented by 4 msec every time the normal process is performed once. In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display device 43 in the present embodiment. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting color change display (variation display) is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output processing of normal processing, special display is performed. Color change display is started in the device 43. The special display device 43 is a three-color LED as described above, and changes color to green if the lit color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Then, after step S917 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17, if step S802 is YES, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S807 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when a display timer of 10000 msec is set, the value of the display timer is 9996 msec in the display timer subtraction process in the next normal process for the time when the display timer is set.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S808, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S808. If an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the display timer is canceled [turned off (cleared)] in step S809, and stop display setting for performing a stop display on the special display device 43 is performed in step S810. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output process in the normal process. In other words, if it is a promiscuous jackpot with a transition to the high probability mode, the red is stopped (for example, lighted only for a few seconds), and if it is a regular jackpot with a transition to the time reduction mode, the green is stopped and displayed. If it is off, blue is stopped and displayed. Again, the main display is such a stop display by the special display device 43, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary.

  In step S811, discrimination information setting processing is performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, it is determined in step S1001 whether or not the stop display corresponds to a jackpot. Here, when it corresponds to jackpot, it transfers to step S1002 and performs jackpot setting. Specifically, processing for setting a jackpot flag, a variable flag, a variable timer, and a round number counter is performed. And after completion | finish of step S1002, a discrimination | determination information setting process is complete | finished.

  The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is a special gaming state, and here, “1” indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value. The value of the jackpot flag is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  The variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in an open state.

  The variable timer is means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening.

  The round number counter is discriminating information for discriminating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of special prize occurrences, that is, the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32) as will be described later. “15” indicating 15 rounds is set as a value.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the jackpot does not correspond, that is, it is determined that the game is out of place, the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed). As will be described later, “100” is set as the counter value after the end of the normal jackpot.

  Here, when the variation counter is canceled (in the off state), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (in the ON state), it is regarded that the time reduction state is being set, and in step S1004, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1005. To do.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the 100th variation display after the end of the normal jackpot (after the provision of the time reduction state). Here, if the remaining value of the variation counter is 0 count, a process of resetting a high pitching state flag described later in step S1006 is performed (set to “0”), and a time shortening state flag described later is set in step S1007. A process of resetting (setting “0”) is performed, a process of canceling (turning off) the variation counter is performed in step S1008, and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the value of the variation counter is not 0 count, the present process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 17, after the discrimination information setting process in step S <b> 811 is finished, the first display control process is finished. If the determination in step S808 is negative, in step S812, the color change display setting for continuously performing the color change display (fluctuation display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is performed, and this process is terminated. To do. Based on the setting contents of the color change display setting, a control signal for performing color change display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, it is set to change the color to green if the current lighting color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Thereby, the color change display (variable display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms. In the present embodiment, the determination information setting process (step S811) is performed after the stop display setting process (step S810). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display setting process (step S806). It is good also as a structure performed after.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the variable winning device 32 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and when the variable flag is set in the determination processing of step S1201 ( When the variable flag is released (in the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state.

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal is output to the variable winning device 32 to close the big winning opening, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the variable flag is on, the variable winning device 32 is considered to be in the open state, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S1202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  In step S1203, the value of the variable timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1203. If a positive determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32 in step S1205 has reached a specified number. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S1204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 has not reached the prescribed number, this processing is terminated as it is. Therefore, the variable winning device 32 maintains the open state until the specified opening time elapses or until the specified number of game balls wins, and becomes the closed state when the condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been released, that is, the number of executed rounds has reached a specified number (the value of the round number counter is 0), taking into account the value of the round number counter. . Here, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number, in step S1206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter, and this process is terminated as it is. That is, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executed rounds reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that the number of rounds has reached the specified number, an end setting process is performed in step S1207, and the process ends.

  In the end setting process of step S1207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (cancellation process), the jackpot flag reset process, the round number counter reset process, the high probability state flag setting process, and the time reduction state flag setting process Then, a process for setting a high pitching state flag, a process for setting a variation counter, and the like are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer.

  In the jackpot flag reset process, “0” indicating the end of the jackpot state is set as the flag value.

  The round number counter is canceled (off) by the reset processing of the round number counter.

  The high probability state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high probability state. In the high probability state flag setting process, the high probability state flag is stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. The flag value is switched and set based on the value of the current mode determination counter C2. As a result, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot), “1” indicating the occurrence of a high probability state is set as the flag value, and the time reduction mode is set (normal jackpot) “0” indicating the occurrence of a low probability state is set as the flag value.

  The time reduction state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a time reduction state. In the time reduction state flag setting process, “1” indicating that a time reduction state is generated is set. Set as a flag value.

  The high entry state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high entry state, and indicates that the high entry state is generated in the high entry state flag setting process. “1” is set as the flag value.

  The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the variation counter setting process, the high probability state flag setting process and Similarly, the change count counter is switched based on the value of the mode determination counter C2. Thus, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot is finished (probability jackpot), the variation counter is canceled (off). On the other hand, when the time reduction mode is set (usually a big hit), “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter.

  Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 22, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not switching display (variation display) by the normal symbol display device 41 is in progress by looking at the setting state of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not in the variable display, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the number of reserved balls N is greater than zero. At this time, if the number of reserved balls N is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variable display is not being performed and the number of held balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls N. In step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the display timer setting process of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Note that the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 in the present embodiment is set in advance in each of the high and low entrance states as described above. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing, the normal symbol is output. Switching display is started on the display device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If step S2101 is YES, that is, if variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2107. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the display timer is released [turned off (cleared)] in step S2108, and stop display setting for performing stop display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process in the normal process. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not it is won is determined based on the relationship between the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 and the mode at that time, and as described above, the numerical value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the low entry state such as the normal mode. Of the 0 to 250, “5-153” is the winning value, and “5 to 228” is the winning value in a high pitched state such as the high probability mode.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110 to perform discrimination information setting processing, and this processing is terminated. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing an opening / closing process of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is performed. Specifically, a setting process of a variable flag, a variable timer, and an opening number counter is performed.

  The variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is open.

  The variable timer is means for measuring the opening time of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening start.

  The opening number counter is determination information for determining the number of execution times of the opening / closing process of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity handling unit control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the opening / closing member 33c (the lower winning opening 33b) of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is in the open state, and the determination process in step S2201 described above. In this case, when the variable flag is set (in the on state), it is regarded as being in the open state, and when the variable flag is released (in the case of the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state. .

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the first opportunity handling unit 33 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, and the lower prize opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member 33c is output to the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, and the lower prize opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the variable flag is on, it is considered that the lower winning opening 33b of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is open, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, whether or not the number of game balls won in the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a and lower winning opening 33b) has reached a prescribed number in step S2205. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S2204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the number of winnings to the first opportunity handling unit 33 has not reached the specified number, this processing is terminated. Therefore, the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 maintains the open state of the lower winning opening 33b until a specified opening time elapses or until a specified number of game balls wins, and enters a closed state when the above condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S2204, it is determined whether the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33 has reached a specified number by taking into account the value of the number of times of opening counter (the value of the opening number counter is 0). . If the number of times of opening has not reached the specified number of times, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of times of opening counter in step S2206, and this process is terminated. That is, the opening / closing process is repeatedly performed until a predetermined number of times set in advance is reached.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2204 that the number of times of opening has reached the specified number of times, an end setting process is performed in step S2207, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process in step S2207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (release process), the release number counter reset process, and the like are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer. Further, the release number counter is released (turned off) by the reset process of the release number counter.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 24, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the write pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the next received command is stored in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined based on the detection signal from the lower plate full switch (not shown), and when the lower plate is full, the setting of the lower plate full state is executed. When it is no longer, execute the setting of the lower pan full tank release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the absence of the tank ball is discriminated based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch (not shown), and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Executes the setting of the no-release state.

  After that, in step S3207, if there is a state to be notified, for example, when various error states such as a bottom pan full error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error have occurred, the main control device uses this as an error signal. To H.261.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and the dispensing device 358 is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, processing of the sub control device 262 will be described. The sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the display mode is transferred to the display control device 45 in the decorative symbol display device 42. Display.

  Here, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This normal process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, in step S3901, external output processing for transmitting a control signal based on the setting content updated in the previous processing to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  In step S3902, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 and the upper, middle, and lower outlier counters CL, CM, and the like used for setting the outlier symbols in the upper row, middle row, and lower row, CR is used. The off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 determines the symbol when the variation of the decorative symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot is hit (the jackpot symbol). In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the decorative symbol. There are 5 patterns and 5 normal symbols. Accordingly, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the big hit decoration symbol counter C5. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter C5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, and reaches 0 to the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “A1” indicating a combination of probability variation symbols, for example, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), the counter value is If it is 0, it is “1”. ) If it is 4, the combination of probability variation symbols is determined in such a manner as “9” (the flat eye). When the symbol command is “A2” indicating a combination of normal symbols, for example, if the counter value is 0, “0” (based on a table (not shown) that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) ( 1) “2” (for the doublet), 2 for “4” (for the doublet), 3 for “6” (for the doublet), 4 for “8” ”(The doublet) and the normal symbol combination is determined. The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is periodically updated in the counter update process in step S3902, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. It may be.

  The upper, middle and lower off symbol counters CL, CM, CR determine the stop symbol (combination of the off symbol) of the upper row ornament symbol, middle row ornament symbol, and lower row ornament symbol when the big hit lottery is missed. Since each of 10 decorative symbols is displayed in each column, 10 (0 to 9) counter values are prepared for each column. The stop symbol of the upper symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CL, the stop symbol of the middle symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol of the lower symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CR.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and It is stored in one of the completely off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each off symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 30, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the out symbol counter CL of the upper symbol row, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the out symbol counter CM in the middle symbol row. . It should be noted that each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR of the upper symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the lower symbol row is configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the out symbol counter CR in the lower symbol row has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the out symbol counter CL in the upper symbol row has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If the upper symbol sequence is updated (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the out symbol symbol CL of the upper symbol sequence. If the middle symbol row update time (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the middle symbol row outlier symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if the lower symbol sequence is updated (NO in steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the out symbol counter CR of the lower symbol sequence is updated. In updating the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR of the upper symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the lower symbol row are updated one by one in a single update process. The update times of the values do not overlap. As a result, every time the update process is executed three times, the set symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated for one set.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated out symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination, and if it is a reach symbol combination (YES in S4006), Further, in step S4007, it is determined whether or not it is a front-rear reach. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of front / rear out of reach (front / rear out symbol) (YES in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4008, and the combination of the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. Is stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach other than front / rear disengagement (design other than front / back disengagement) (NO in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time The combination is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear deviation of the RAM 553.

  If the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the process proceeds to step S4010 to determine whether or not the combination of the symbol symbols CL, CM, and CR is out of the combination, and the symbol is separated. If it is a combination of symbols (completely deviated symbols) (YES in S4010), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the combination of deviated symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely deviated symbol buffer of the RAM 553. If NO in both steps S4006 and S4010, the symbols are aligned at the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. In this case, the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are used as buffers. This process is terminated without storing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 28, in step S3903, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received. In this case, by confirming the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received. If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3904. On the other hand, if no command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3906.

  The command buffer of the RAM 553 temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261, and is composed of a ring buffer similar to the above.

  In the subsequent effect setting process in step S3905, for example, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. Accordingly, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined here, and a value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern command is set in the variation time measurement timer. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table associating, for example, a decoration symbol variation type and a variation pattern command as shown in FIG.

  The display command is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, based on information stored in the command buffer. Each time a necessary display command is generated.

  Here, the stop symbol is also determined based on the symbol command. As described above, when “A1” is set in the symbol command, any combination of symbols 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. If “A3” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer (see FIG. 29) of the RAM 553 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely off symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol.

  Then, a display command to be output to the display control device 45 is generated based on these pieces of information. Usually, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a normal variable data group, a reach effect data group, and the like. Basically, each data constituting these data groups is the variable time timer. Are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time order, thereby providing display effects according to various variation patterns. For example, the normal fluctuation data group includes normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2,..., And normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group includes reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2,. In the case of n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 →... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and subsequently reach effect data 1 → 2 → with the start of reach effect. ... → Data is sequentially output in the order of n.

  Then, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts a variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device. Once the variation pattern command is received from main controller 261, sub-control is performed until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (until the variation time timer set in step S3905 becomes 0). Under the cooperation of the device 262 and the display control device 45, the variable display of symbols is continued.

  Then, when the main control device 261 determines the jackpot, the special display device 43 displays that fact, and the decorative symbol is supplementally combined with the jackpot symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the special game video is displayed as the jackpot. Is displayed (a jackpot is started).

  In step S3906, other processing such as control settings for driving sounds and lamps and display control settings during display of the demonstration screen is performed, and then the present processing is terminated. For example, when a command for performing blinking control of the error display lamp 104 is received from the main control device 261, setting for controlling blinking of the error display lamp 104 is performed.

  As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the signal level input from the winning opening switch 221 and the like is monitored to make a ball entry determination, and the abnormality monitoring timer CT determines a predetermined opportunity from the time of a predetermined ball entry determination. The time until (when the first specified time or the second specified time has elapsed) is measured, and the abnormality is determined based on the elapsed time. If any abnormality is detected, a notification means such as the error display lamp 104 notifies the game hall related parties and the like. Thereby, for example, the radio wave goto as exemplified in the above-mentioned “problem to be solved by the invention” (detected by dividing the level signal output based on detecting the game ball that actually passes the winning opening switch 221 etc. Radio waves that increase the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “first radio waves”) and radio waves using the illegal large spheres (hereinafter referred to as “second radio waves”) are detected as radio waves. It is possible to detect early without providing a sensor, and thus to suppress the fraud.

  In addition, when a radio wave detection sensor is used as an anti-radio wave prevention measure, there is a possibility that a problem exemplified below may occur. For example, when it is intended to cover the entire gaming area where a plurality of entrance means are arranged with a single radio wave detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor with a wide detection range must be used, and radio waves that are not related to unauthorized radio waves. May be detected. On the other hand, when a radio wave detection sensor with a narrow detection range is provided corresponding to each ball entry means, there is a risk of increasing the number of parts, complicating the mounting structure, complicating electrical wiring, and the like.

  Further, in detecting the “first radio wave”, it is necessary to eliminate the influence of radio waves and the like unrelated to fraudulent acts. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection start interval is set to 36 msec or less. The number of times that abnormal abnormality is detected is counted, and an error notification is made only when the number of times becomes 50 or more. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to a true fraud, and the fraud can be efficiently prevented. As a result, it is possible for the game hall to avoid unnecessary troubles with the player, such as not issuing an alarm unnecessarily, and to manage the hall smoothly.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time measurement for detecting the “first radio wave goto” and the time measurement for detecting the “second radio wave goto” are performed by a common abnormality monitoring timer CT. Therefore, the configuration can be simplified.

[Second Embodiment]
The configuration according to the second embodiment will be described below. However, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32 as a variable winning means, a starting winning unit (first opportunity corresponding unit) 33 as a starting winning means, and a through gate (second opportunity corresponding port) 34. The variable display device unit 35, the first special display device 43L, the second special display device 43R, and the like are disposed in through holes formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and is sent to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15). A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, when there is a ball entering the start winning unit 33, there are three balls when there is a ball entering the general winning slot 31, and when there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32. Fifteen game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (lower plate 15).

  The start winning unit 33 includes an upper winning opening 33a (first starting entering means) and a lower winning opening 33b (second starting entering means), and a pair of opening and closing members provided on both sides of the lower winning opening 33b. 33c. The upper winning opening 33a allows a game ball to always enter, while the lower winning opening 33b is a game that flows down the gaming area by the opening / closing member 33c opening and closing in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition. The state can be changed between an open state in which a ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter. As will be described in detail later, the start winning unit 33 includes a first start winning switch (first opportunity corresponding unit switch) 224a and second detecting the game balls that have entered the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b. A start winning switch (second opportunity corresponding unit switch) 224b is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state is determined. The special display devices 43L and 43R (and the decorative symbol display device 42) perform variable display. And, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, a big hit state is given.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot types include “probable bonus jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, “surprise jackpot” and “JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot”.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the jackpot state of “probable jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot”, after the opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the specified time of 30 seconds is reached. One open / close operation (hereinafter referred to as “long open”) until a closed state is obtained on the condition that a predetermined number of 10 game balls have won a prize in the variable prize winning device 32 as one special prize state. This is repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds).

  In the big hit state of “surprising big hit”, after the opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, 0.4 seconds of the specified time has elapsed or the variable winning device 32 has a specified number of pieces. One open / close operation (hereinafter referred to as “short opening”) until the game is closed on condition that one game ball wins is regarded as one special prize state, and this is repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds). Is called.

  In the big hit state of “JUB jackpot”, “short open” is set as one special prize state, this is repeated 10 times at maximum, and then “long open” is set as one special prize state, and this is set to 9 Repeated once. In other words, a maximum of 10 “short releases” are performed in the first round, and “long releases” are performed in the second to tenth rounds.

  As mentioned above, in the jackpot states of “probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot” and “JUB jackpot”, a “long open” will be performed, so a large increase in gaming balls can be expected, but the “surprise jackpot” jackpot In the state, since only “short opening” is performed, the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit state is extremely small (an increase in game balls can hardly be expected).

  In addition, when “probable big hit”, “surprise big hit”, or “JUB big hit” occurs, a high probability state (high probability mode such as a probability variation mode described later) is given after the big hit state ends. However, since only “short open” is performed in the big hit state of “surprise big hit”, the player is given a surprise as if it suddenly shifted to the probable change mode without going into the big hit state. Can do. On the other hand, when “normal jackpot” occurs, a low probability state (low probability mode such as a time shortening mode, which will be described later) is given after the jackpot state ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, apart from the above various “big hits”, “small hits” are generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the above-mentioned lottery drawing. In the small hit state, similarly to the big hit state of “surprising big hit”, “short open” is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds). However, the game mode given after the small hit state is the original game mode before the small hit state occurs. For example, if the game mode before the small hit state is the probability change mode, the probability change mode is maintained even after the small hit state ends, and if the game mode before the small hit state is the normal mode, even after the small hit state ends Normal mode is maintained.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the top winning opening 33a and the case where it wins the bottom winning opening 33b, it is a big hit that is awarded when winning in the winning lottery The distribution of types is different. If you win the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the top winning award 33a, it will be assigned to either “probable big hit”, “normal big hit”, “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit” When the winning lottery with the game ball entering the lower prize opening 33b is won, the winning ballot is assigned to either “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”.

  The first and second special display devices 43 </ b> L and 43 </ b> R are configured by 7-segment display devices and are installed on the right side of the variable winning device 32. Then, when the game ball enters the top winning port 33a of the start winning unit 33, the first special display device 43L performs switching display (variable display), and the game ball enters the lower winning port 33b. As a trigger, switching display (variation display) is performed on the second special display device 43R. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not a big hit is determined is displayed depending on the display mode (for example, characters) when the variable display is stopped. The For example, when a game ball wins the top winning opening 33a, “-” → “7” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” → “−” on the corresponding first special display device 43L. “→... Is displayed at high speed (for example, every 4 msec), and when a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, when the big hit lottery is won, any one of “7”, “3”, “2”, and “1” is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and a big win state is generated. However, as will be described later, when the game ball wins the lower winning opening 33b, “surprise big hit” and “JUB big hit” do not occur, so “2” and “1” are displayed in the second special display device 43R. The decision is not displayed.

  Specifically, when “probable big hit” is given, “7” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when “normal big hit” is given, the first Alternatively, when “3” is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R, and “Abrupt big hit” is given, “2” is stopped on the first special display device 43L and “JUB big hit” is given. When this is done, “1” is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 43L.

  When “small hit” is given, “0” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R.

  In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). However, if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed in either case, “-” is displayed in both cases. Not limited to this, other configurations may be adopted. For example, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the content previously stopped and displayed on the other (for example, the previous “1” is stopped) If it is displayed, “1”) is displayed as it is, and if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed, the contents stopped and displayed last time are displayed as they are in both. It is good also as a structure.

  In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning unit 33 during the variation display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variation display is performed at that time. It is the structure performed after the end of. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the game ball won in the top winning port 33a and the game ball won in the lower winning port 33b. Then, the variation display up to four times (total eight variation display) is put on hold. In addition, the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. If a new game ball wins the start winning unit 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  Basically, the variable display triggered by winning in the top winning opening 33a is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the top winning opening 33a and is digested in the order in which they entered, and the bottom winning opening 33b. The change display triggered by winning a prize is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the lower winning opening 33b and digested in the order in which they entered. However, when both the variable display triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a and the variable display triggered by entering the lower winning opening 33b are held (the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding hold) In the case where one or more lamps 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the entry into the lower prize opening 33b is preferentially digested. In other words, unless all the variable displays triggered by winning in the lower winning opening 33b are digested, the variable display triggered by entering the upper winning opening 33a is not performed. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the lower winning opening 33b and one second holding lamp 46b lights, the player enters the upper winning opening 33a. The change display that is triggered is postponed, and the change display that is triggered by the ball entering the lower prize opening 33b is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation display triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a is also referred to as “first fluctuation display”, and the fluctuation display triggered by entering the lower winning opening 33b is referred to as “second fluctuation display”. Is also referred to.

  Further, the through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. The through gate 34 includes a through gate switch (second opportunity corresponding port switch) 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225. An open lottery for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 is in an open state is performed, and a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. When the winning lottery is won, the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

  The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device that variably displays in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 35 indicates a variation indicating whether the variation display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to which of the top winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b. A lamp 40, the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b, and a holding lamp 44 are provided.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display at that time. It has become. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the command from the main control device 261 as the main control means (control means) is set so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Based on this, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 262, and display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of symbols (numerals) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area. The symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each display region (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display region → the lower symbol display region → the middle symbol display region). For example, when “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit” is confirmed in the main controller 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and the jackpot state is started. In the case of “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”, as will be described later, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 does not correspond to the big hit.

  Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in combinations corresponding to jackpots, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, for example, as a preceding stage. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state.

  If the big hit state does not occur even if the reach state occurs, the symbols different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Further, in the case of “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot”, the numbers of the blue eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as described above, but “surprise jackpot” or “JUB jackpot” In such a case, a predetermined combination of specific numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of the doublet. For example, in the present embodiment, “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. Of course, the combination of specific numbers that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be different depending on whether the “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”. In addition, in the case of “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”, it will be displayed in a stop combination with a random deviation on the surface as well as when it is off, instead of a predetermined combination of numbers. It may be.

  In addition, the variation specifying lamp 40 includes a blue light emitting LED and a red light emitting LED, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a variation display triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a. When the display is changed, the light is emitted in blue, and when the variable display is triggered by the entry into the lower prize opening 33b, the light is emitted in red.

  The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entrance 151 is provided in the upper portion of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 along the side of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via a warp channel 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed at the center back side of the stage 153. . The pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 that leads to a game area directly above the start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a), and a game ball that has entered the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability. The start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a) is entered.

  As described above, the variable prize-winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and when a special game state such as a big win or a small win occurs, it is in an open state in which the game ball can be won. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 as a success / failure random number generating means used for a jackpot lottery (whether / not-win lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a jackpot type as a type random number generating means used for determining the jackpot type The determination counter C2 (corresponding to the mode determination counter C2 in the first embodiment), the variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1 Initial value random number counter CINI used for value setting, variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determination of variation display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and normal symbols Lottery of the display device 41 (open lottery for determining whether or not the opening / closing member 33c of the start winning unit 33 is opened) It is set to be used and normal symbol random number counter C4 to use. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined based on the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the variation pattern are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special variable reservation area as a storage area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas).

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable storage area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the top winning opening 33a. Stored. In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the lower winning opening 33b. Stored. In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times as described above.

  In detail, each jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 599) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. The value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper winning hole 33a or the lower winning hole 33b of the start winning unit 33 is changed to the first special variable holding area or the first 2 Stored in the special variable holding area. There are two types of random numbers that are jackpots: a low probability state (low probability mode such as normal mode and time reduction mode) and a high probability state (high probability mode such as probability variation mode). In the low probability state, the number of random number values that are jackpots is two, the values are “7, 307”, and in the high probability state, the number of random number values that are jackpots is 20, The values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. That is, in the low probability state, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/300 (a jackpot state occurs), and in the high probability state, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/30. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success / failure determination table as a winning value storage means that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. In the present embodiment, there are two success / failure determination tables, and there are a first success / failure determination table storing “7, 307” and a second success / failure determination table storing “8-16, 308-316”.

  The value of the big hit random number counter C1 is also used when determining “small hit”. The value of the random number for “small hit” is one, and the value is “150”.

  Here, various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, the game mode (game state) is switched between “normal mode”, “probability change mode”, and “time reduction mode”.

  “Normal mode” refers to a normal state that is not “probability change mode” or “time reduction mode”. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state) is a normal low probability (for example, 1/300). That is, the “normal mode” of the present embodiment is a low probability mode to which a time shortening state and a high pitching state described later are not added.

  “Probability change mode” means that “7” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R (the probability change symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42), and “probability change big hit” is thereby achieved. Or “2” or “1” is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 43L (the chance symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42) or “JUN jackpot” or “JUB jackpot” In other words, the jackpot probability after the jackpot ends is higher than that in the “normal mode” (for example, 1/30). The “probability change mode” continues until the next jackpot state occurs.

  Furthermore, in the “probability change mode” of the present embodiment, not only the jackpot probability is increased, but also the time display state in which the variable display time in the special display devices 43L and 43R is short is reduced. In addition, as compared with the “normal mode”, the opening time of the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) per winning is longer and the number of opening is increased. As a result, the time period during which the start winning unit 33 is in the open state is lengthened, so that a high winning state in which game balls frequently enter the starting winning unit 33 (the lower winning opening 33b) becomes a big hit lottery. Will be done continuously and will be in good condition. That is, the “probability change mode” of the present embodiment is a high probability mode to which a time reduction state and a high pitching state are added.

  In “probability change mode”, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, or the probability that the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 (winning probability of the open lottery) is set to “normal mode”. It is good also as making it high and making it into a high pitched state.

  In the “time reduction mode”, the first or second special display device 43L, 43R is stopped and displayed with “3” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a normal symbol other than a predetermined probability variation symbol). The game mode is set over a total of 100 variable displays performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R after the jackpot state ends. The “time reduction mode” has the same low probability as the jackpot probability in the “normal mode”, and the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the start winning unit 33 is higher than the ratio in the “normal mode”. It is a game mode. That is, except for the difference in the jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state), the state is the same as the “probability change mode”. That is, the “time reduction mode” of the present embodiment is a low probability mode to which a time reduction state and a high pitching state are added. In the “time reduction mode”, even if a big hit state does not occur, after the variable display is performed 100 times in total on the special display devices 43L and 43R, the mode shifts to the “normal mode”.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is configured such that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter C2 determines which of the jackpot types, that is, “probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”, “surprise jackpot”, or “JUB jackpot” is given. .

  The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table as a jackpot type determination value storage means that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, and the first jackpot type determination table that is considered when a game ball wins the top winning opening 33a and the game ball wins the top winning opening 33a. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is considered in some cases.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the top winning opening 33a, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “probable jackpot” is given, and “6, 7”. For example, if “8-11” is determined, “JUB jackpot” is determined. If “12-19”, “ordinary jackpot” is determined. In other words, if the winning lottery with the winning of the top winning opening 33a is won, it becomes “probable big hit” with a probability of 30%, “surprise big hit” with a probability of 10%, and “ “JUB jackpot” and “normal jackpot” with a probability of 40%.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the bottom winning opening 33b, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “0 to 11”, the “probable jackpot” is determined to be given. Giving "Big Bonus" is decided. That is, when winning or failing lottery with the winning of the lower winning opening 33b is won, it becomes “probable big hit” with a probability of 60% and “ordinary big hit” with a probability of 40%. As described above, when the game ball wins the lower winning opening 33b, the “surprise big hit” and the “JUB big hit” do not occur.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. The value of the big hit type determination counter C2 stored in the big win type determination counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the top winning port 33a or the lower winning port 33b of the start winning unit 33 is changed to a special variable holding area ( Stored in the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation holding area).

  Further, the variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. In this embodiment, after the reach is generated with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped, and the last stop after the occurrence of reach is also performed. It is decided to draw “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and “Complete detachment” where no reach occurs. In the present embodiment, the reach determination table referred to when determining whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach state and which reach corresponds to the ROM 502. Is provided. In the reach determination table, a value of “0 to 238” is stored, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the reach out of front and back, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration that corresponds to a detachment.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area (first area) of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b of the start winning unit 33. Stored in the special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation holding area).

  In the present embodiment, when “probability jackpot” or “normal jackpot” occurs, any one of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected, and when “out-of-back reach” occurs, Either normal reach or super reach is selected, and when “reach other than front / rear out” occurs, normal reach is selected. In addition, in the case of “completely off”, none of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, after reaching 9 and to the lower limit value of 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won is six and the range is “3 to 8.” When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. Is performed for a predetermined time, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state for a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, the probability that the symbol corresponding to the winning is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, that is, the winning probability of the open lottery for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 is in the open state is in any mode. But it is common. However, as described above, in the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode”, the change time of the change display performed in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened compared to the case of the “normal mode”. . Of course, as described above, the winning probability of the open lottery may be changed according to the game mode.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified as in the first embodiment. The main processing is started when the power is turned on, the timer interrupt processing is started periodically (in this embodiment at a cycle of 2 msec), and the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to (non-maskable terminal).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 38, first, in step U301, various incoming ball detection switch reading processes are executed. As will be described in detail later, here, the state of various ball detection switches connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  In step U302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step U303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). , 238, 9) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step U304, a start winning process associated with winning the start winning unit 33 is executed, and in step U305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the switch reading process in step U301 will be described in detail. In this switch reading process, each ball detection switch (award opening switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switch 224a, 224b, through gate switch 225) is individually monitored and the same process is performed individually. . Therefore, although the switch reading process related to the winning opening switch 221 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 39 as an example, the same process as the process shown in FIG. The function of the switch reading process in step U301 constitutes the ball entry determining means in this embodiment.

  First, in step U3101, the signal level of the input signal from the winning prize switch 221 is checked. The function of this processing constitutes the signal monitoring means in this embodiment.

  For example, when the game ball is not passing through the passage hole of the winning opening switch 221, a high level signal (H) of + 12V is output from the winning opening switch 221 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32A), and main control is performed. On the device 261 side, a low level signal (L) having a reference potential of 0 V is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32B). FIG. 32A is a timing chart for explaining an output signal from the winning opening switch 221, and FIG. 32B is a timing chart for explaining an input signal to the CPU 501.

  On the other hand, while a game ball enters the general winning port 31 and the game ball is passing through the passage hole of the winning port switch 221, a low level signal (L) is output from the winning port switch 221 [ In the main controller 261 side, the high level signal (H) is input to the CPU 501 via the inverting circuit 229 (see timings t2 and t3 in FIG. 32B).

  In the following step U3102, the signal level checked in step U3101 is stored in the signal level buffer for the winning opening switch 221 provided in the work area of the RAM 503.

  The signal level buffer is provided corresponding to each ball detection switch (winning port switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switch 224a, 224b, through gate switch 225), and for each ball detection switch. Each signal level is stored. The signal level buffer corresponds to the level storage means in this embodiment.

  In addition, the latest 200 msec data, that is, 100 cycles of data is stored in the ring buffer that constitutes each signal level buffer of this embodiment, and the oldest data beyond this is erased in order. Yes. Further, the position of the read pointer indicates a predetermined address position where the latest data is stored. As described later, the data for the past plural times is read based on the position of the read pointer. .

  Returning to the description of step U3102, each time the signal level is checked at a cycle of 2 msec, a logical value corresponding to the signal level is sequentially written in a predetermined address position indicated by the write pointer in the signal level buffer for the winning opening switch 221. To go. Here, when the signal level of the input signal to the CPU 501 is “H (high)”, a logical value “1” is stored as level information indicating this, and the signal level is “L (low)”. Stores a logical value “0” as level information indicating this.

  Thereafter, in step U3103, a calculation process which is a pre-process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 31 is performed.

  More specifically, logical inversion processing is performed on the earliest data (oldest data) of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer, and the earliest data that has been logically inverted and the remaining 2 data. Calculate the logical product of all the batch data. Then, this value is temporarily stored in the work area of the RAM 503. The function of this processing constitutes the logic inversion means and the logical product calculation means in this embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the logical values of the signal levels stored at timings t1, t2, and t3 are “0”, “1”, and “1”, the logical inversion of the earliest data When processing is performed, the earliest data is “1”. Therefore, the logical product of this data and the other two data is “1”.

  In the following step U3104, it is determined whether or not the logical product value calculated in step U3103 is “1”. Here, when the logical product value is “1”, it means that the signal level has been switched from “L” to “H”. In step U3105, “1” is set to the value of the ball entry determination flag for the winning hole switch 221 (general winning hole 31), and this process is terminated. In addition, the entrance discrimination flag is a discriminator for discriminating whether or not there is an entrance and is provided corresponding to each entrance detection switch. In the start winning process in step U304 and the through gate passing process in step U305, the presence / absence of a ball is determined based on this.

  On the other hand, when the logical product value is “0”, the signal level remains “L” or “H” for the past 4 msec, or the signal level does not switch from “H” to “L”. Therefore, it is determined that there is no entry to the general winning opening 31, and in step U3106, the value of the entering determination flag for the winning opening switch 221 is set to “0”. Exit.

  Here, the start winning process in step U304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The execution area of the special variable holding area and each holding area include a jackpot random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area is provided for storing the values. In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number storage area stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. The jackpot type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area each use 1 byte to store the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  First, in step U501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the lower winning opening 33b based on the value of the above-mentioned winning determination flag corresponding to the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step U501, in step U502, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the lower winning opening 33b is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4”). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step U502, the process proceeds to step U509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U502, the process proceeds to step U503, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the following step U504, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update processing in the above step U303 are obtained from the vacant reserved areas in the second special variable reserved area. Store in the first area. After step U504, the process proceeds to step U505.

  In step U505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In subsequent step U506, when it is determined in step U505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, it is based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variable holding area. Then, the second mode determination process for determining the type of jackpot is performed. Details of the second mode determination process will be described later.

  In the following step U507, when it is determined in step U505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. After step U507, the process proceeds to step U509. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step U505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot (value stored in the first hit / fail judgment table) “7”, “307”. It is discriminated whether it matches either of the above. In FIG. 41, for the sake of convenience, the process of step U5101 is described in a simplified manner. However, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “307”. If an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step U5101, which determination is made. If a negative determination is made at step U5101, a negative determination is made at step U5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U 5101, that is, if it is determined that a big hit state occurs, the big win winning flag is turned on in step U 5102, and then the process proceeds to step U 5105.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5101, it is determined in step U5103 whether or not a high probability state flag, which will be described later, is on, and whether or not it is a high probability state (high probability mode such as probability variation mode). Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U5103, that is, if the state is a high probability state, in step U5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is stored in the second success / failure determination table. It is determined whether or not any of “8 to 16, 308 to 316”. Note that in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U5104, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs in the high probability state, the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step U5102, and the process proceeds to step U5105.

  If a negative determination is made in step U5103 or step U5104, that is, if it is “out”, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Further, in step U5105, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area matches the value “150” corresponding to the small hit.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U5105, that is, if it is determined that a small hit state is generated, the small win winning flag is turned on in step U5106, and then the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5105, the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the second mode determination processing in step U506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5201, it is determined whether or not the big win winning flag is set in the big hit determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step U5201, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5201, in step U5202, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is set to “normal” in consideration of the second jackpot type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “12 to 19” corresponding to “big hit”. If a negative determination is made in step U5202, that is, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is any of the values “0 to 11” corresponding to “probable variation jackpot”, the probability variation flag is turned on in step U5203. Then, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5202, the normal flag is turned on in step U5204, and then this process ends.

  Next, the reach determination process in step U507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5301, it is determined whether or not a winning flag (a big win winning flag or a small win winning flag) has been set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5301, that is, if a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5301, that is, if a big hit state does not occur, in step U5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is taken into account in the reach determination table. Is determined to be equal to one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “out-of-front / rear reach”. If the determination in step U5302 is affirmative, in step U5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5302, the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is referred to in step U5304 as “reach other than front / rear out”. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values “2 to 21” corresponding to. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5304, the flag is turned on other than before and after in step U5305, and then this process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step U5304, that is, if it is “completely off”, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, after the process of step U507, or when a negative determination is made in step U501, in step U509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a. The determination is made based on the value of the above-described entrance determination flag corresponding to the switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step U509, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step U510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4”). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step U510, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U510, the process proceeds to step U511 to increment the upper hold counter Na by one.

  In the following step U512, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the reserved areas that are free in the first special variable suspension area. After step U512, the process proceeds to step U513.

  In step U513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination process in step U513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step U505, and only the point that the information related to the variable display to be processed is based on the ball entering the top winning opening 33a. Different. For this reason, detailed description is omitted for convenience.

  In the following step U514, when it is determined in step U513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variable holding area. Then, a first mode determination process for determining the type of jackpot is performed. Details of the first mode determination process will be described later.

  In the following step U515, when it is determined in step U513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. After step U515, this process ends. Note that the reach determination process in step U515 is the same as the reach determination process in step U507, except that the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the top winning opening 33a. For this reason, detailed description is omitted for convenience.

  Next, the first mode determination process in step U514 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5401, it is determined whether or not the big win winning flag is set in the big hit determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step U5401, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5401, in step U5402, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variable holding area is set to “normal” in consideration of the first jackpot type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “12 to 19” corresponding to “big hit”. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5402, the normal flag is turned on in step U5403, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5402, in step U5404, the first jackpot type determination table is considered, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is any of the values “8 to 11” corresponding to “JUB jackpot”. It is determined whether or not they match. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5404, the JUB flag is turned on in step U5405, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5404, in step U5406, the first jackpot type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is any of the values “6, 7” corresponding to “surprise big hit”. It is determined whether or not they match. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5406, the susceptibility flag is turned on in step U5407, and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5406, the probability variation flag is turned on in step U5408, and then this process ends.

  In addition, the mode determination means in this embodiment is comprised by the 2nd mode determination process of step U506, the 1st mode determination process of step U514, etc.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step U305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step U601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225.

  If a negative determination is made in step U601, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, in step U602, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step U603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step U604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step U303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the process of steps U201 to U210 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps U211 and U212 is executed in the remaining time.

  First, in step U201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R, the start winning unit 33, etc. updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing that is transmitted to the control device is executed. Here are some more specific examples.

  For example, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been awarded to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 with reference to the various winning determination flags, and if there is a winning prize ball corresponding to the number corresponding to the winning prize. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Then, after the transmission of the command, the value of the corresponding entry discrimination flag is returned to “0”.

  Further, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

  Also, in the external output process, information for grasping the game state is output to the hall computer of the game hall in consideration of various discrimination information such as a jackpot / medium flag described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

  For example, when a ball entry error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and there is no ball entry error. , An off signal is output.

  Further, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the decorative symbol variation, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to display (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, for example, in the “normal mode”, “FF08”, “FF09”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, “FF16” , “FF17” is set as the variation pattern command. Similarly, in the “probability change mode”, “FD07”, “FD08”, “FD09”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, “FD16”, “FD17” are set. The In the “time reduction mode”, “FE07”, “FE08”, “FE09”, “FE11”, “FE12”, “FE13”, “FE14”, “FE15”, “FE16”, “FE17” are set. .

  On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 executes the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, “FF11” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD11” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE11” is set in the “time reduction mode”. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time from which the normal reach is derived is “20 seconds” in “normal mode”, “8 seconds” in “probability mode”, and “10 seconds” in “time reduction mode”. Is set.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types (super reach SR1, SR2, SR3) of 30 second, 40 second, and 50 second patterns are prepared for the super reach in the “normal mode”. The variation display time in the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode” is shortened compared to the “normal mode” in the same manner as the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of super reach SR1, “FF12” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD12” in the “probability change mode”, and “FE12” in the “time reduction mode” are set as the change pattern commands. The In the case of the super reach SR2, “FF13” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD13” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE13” is set in the “time reduction mode”. In the case of the super reach SR3, “FF14” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD14” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE14” is set in the “time reduction mode”.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. In the premium reach of this embodiment, two types (premium reach PR1, PR2) of 60-second and 70-second patterns are prepared in the “normal mode”. The variation display time in the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode” is shortened compared to the “normal mode” in the same manner as the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of premium reach PR1, “FF15” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD15” in the “probability change mode”, “FE15” in the “time reduction mode”, and the change pattern command is set. The In the premium reach PR2, “FF16” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD16” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE16” is set in the “time reduction mode”.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to “completely missed” that does not reach any reach state is an upper hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) triggered by winning in the top winning opening 33a. Depending on the difference between the total value (total number of holds) and the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds in the variable display (second change display) triggered by entering the lower prize opening 33b. Multiple settings are made. In the present embodiment, three types of patterns of 10 seconds, 5 seconds, and 3 seconds (“completely disconnected (10 s)”, “completely disconnected (5 s)”, and “completely disconnected (3 s)”) are prepared. However, the “completely off (3 s)” pattern can be output only in the “probability change mode” or the “time reduction mode”.

  Specifically, when the total number of holds is “0” to “2” in “normal mode”, “FF09” corresponding to “completely off (10 s)” is set as the fluctuation pattern command, and “normal mode” If the total number of holds is “3” or more, “FF08” corresponding to “complete out (5 s)” is set.

  When the total number of holds is “0” in the “probability change mode”, “FD09” corresponding to “complete out (10 s)” is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and in the “probability change mode”, the total number of holds is “ In the case of “1” to “3”, “FD08” corresponding to “completely off (5 s)” is set, and when the total number of holdings is “4” or more in “probability mode”, “completely off” “FD07” corresponding to “(3s)” is set.

  When the total hold count is “0” in the “time reduction mode”, “FE09” corresponding to “completely off (10 s)” is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the total hold count in the “time reduction mode”. Is “1” to “3”, “FE08” corresponding to “completely off (5 s)” is set, and when the total number of holds is “4” or more in the “time reduction mode”, “FE07” corresponding to “completely off (3 s)” is set.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit” is reached, the reach state is not generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are displayed. “3”, “4”, and “1” symbols (chance symbols) are stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the case of “small hit”, the chance symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas without causing the reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42. As a result, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can distinguish between “JUB jackpot” that is more advantageous to the player and “surprise jackpot” or “small jackpot” that is not so advantageous. Therefore, since it can be expected that “JUB jackpot” will occur, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's preference. In this embodiment, “FF17” is set as the variation pattern command in the “normal mode” and the variation pattern command corresponding to “surprise big hit”, “JUB big hit”, and “small hit”, and in the probability variation mode. “FD17” and “FE17” are set in the time reduction mode.

  As described above, the variation pattern command has a 2-byte structure. Of the command consisting of 2 bytes, the first byte (upper byte) is composed of mode information that can determine the game mode at that time. More specifically, “FF” corresponds to mode information indicating “normal mode”, “FD” corresponds to mode information indicating “probability mode”, and “FE” corresponds to mode information indicating “time reduction mode”. Equivalent to.

  The second byte (lower byte) is composed of time information related to effects such as normal reach and pattern information corresponding to more specific instruction contents indicating a variation pattern.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation symbols, a normal symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a complete out symbol design combination. 6 divisions, that is, combination of chance symbols, are designated. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “A1”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, “A6”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described.

  The combination of probability variation symbols is a combination of symbols composed of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 and “A1” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of probability variation symbols. Then, when “A1” indicating the probability variation symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 in the form of a slot. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of normal symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8, and “A2” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of normal symbols. Then, when “A2” indicating the normal symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “A3” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “A4” is set in the command. The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “A5” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols. In addition, “A6” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is one type of chance symbol, and in this example, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are “3”, “4”, and “1” from the top.

  As will be described in detail later, when “A3” to “A5” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. When “A6” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, three commands “A3” to “A5” are prepared as the symbol commands for removal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration with only one symbol command for separation is also possible. Good.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step U202, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step U203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step U204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step U205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what control is performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the jackpot determination and decoration in the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. A design variation pattern is set. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step U206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. Thereby, when the big hit state or the small win state is reached, the opening / closing process of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In Step U207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step U208, an opportunity handling unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the start winning unit 33 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the start winning unit 33.

  After that, in step U209, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If no information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step U210 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step U201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step U201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step U211 and step U212).

  That is, in step U211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step U212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step U202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps U201 to U209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly change The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step U209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step U213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step U213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step U214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step U215. To remember. Thereafter, in step U216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step U217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step U218, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step U209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps U201 to U208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps U211 and U212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step U213), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is shut off, and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step U205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 45, in step U801, referring to various hitting hit flags (big hit hitting flag and small hitting hitting flag), which will be described later in detail, whether or not it is currently hitting (during a big hit state or a small hit state). Is determined. The hit state (big hit state and small hit state) includes the middle of the hit state and a predetermined time after the hit state ends. The predetermined time after the end of the hit state is the time until the normal game (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) starts after the end of the hit state. Generally, this time zone is a decorative symbol display. The device 42 displays the end of the hit state or displays various modes given after the hit. In addition, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the win in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 until the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is opened. (In general, this time zone is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 to indicate the start of the hit state).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U801, that is, if the winning state is in effect, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U801, in step U802, a first display described in detail later is made. By looking at the setting state of the middle flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is in a variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is set (on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the first display flag is released (off state), the variable is displayed. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the display stop state is in progress. As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step U920), and the first and second special displays are performed. It is turned off when the fluctuation display of the devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step U814).

  If a negative determination is made in step U802, that is, if the winning state is not being displayed and the variation is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step U803, and the variation display (second variation) triggered by entering the lower winning hole 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb for counting the number of hold (display) is greater than zero.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U803, that is, if even one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step U804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is held and stored by the determination processing in step U803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step U805, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variable holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step U805, in step U806, the process of turning on / off the second holding lamp 46b and the process of causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step U807.

  If a negative determination is made in step U803, that is, if no second variation display is stored on hold, a variation display (first display) triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a in step U808. It is determined whether or not an upper hold counter Na for counting the number of hold (variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step U808, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step U809. In the following step U810, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step U810, in step U811, a process for turning on / off the first hold lamp 46a and a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step U807. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  In step U807, a variable display setting process is performed. Here, details of the variation display setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U901, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small win winning flag is ON.

  Here, when it is determined that it corresponds to the small hit, the process proceeds to step U910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step U902.

  In step U902, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is ON.

  Here, if it is determined that it corresponds to the jackpot, the process proceeds to step U903. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made, that is, when it is out of place, the process proceeds to step U912.

  In step U903, it is determined whether or not the variation display corresponds to “probability large hit” by determining whether or not the probability variation flag is ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U903, ie, “probable variation jackpot”, the variation pattern corresponding to “probability variation jackpot” is determined in step U904 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U905, the probability variation symbol (“A1” in the present embodiment) is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  If a negative determination is made in step U903, the process proceeds to step U906, where it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display corresponds to “normal jackpot” by determining whether or not the normal flag is on. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step U906, that is, if it is “ordinary jackpot”, the variation pattern corresponding to “ordinary jackpot” is determined in step U907 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U908, the normal symbol (“A2” in the present embodiment) is set as the symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  In steps U904 and U907, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and the decorative symbols are displayed based on the values of the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The pattern variation mode is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are tables for each game mode, as in the first embodiment. Etc. in advance.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step U906, the process proceeds to step U909 to determine whether or not the suddenness flag or the JUB flag is on, so that the fluctuation display becomes “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. If an affirmative determination is made in step U909, that is, if it is a “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”, the process proceeds to step U910.

  In step U910, a fluctuation pattern (chance fluctuation pattern) corresponding to “surprise big hit”, “JUB big hit”, and “small hit” is determined and set in the fluctuation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U911, the chance symbol ("A6" in this embodiment) is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920. As described above, the variation pattern commands corresponding to “surprise big hit”, “JUB big hit” and “small hit” are “FF17” in “normal mode” and “probable change mode” depending on the gaming state. “FE17” is set in “FD17” and “time reduction mode”.

  If a negative determination is made in step U902, that is, if it is “out”, it is determined in step U912 whether or not the front / rear flag is on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U912, that is, if “rearward / rearward reach” is determined, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to “rearward / rearward reach” is determined in step U913, the fluctuation pattern command is set, and the front / rear flag is set. Turn off. Thereafter, in step U914, the back and forth symbols are set as symbol commands, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step U915 whether or not the other than front and rear flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step U915, that is, if “reach other than front / rear off” is determined, a variation pattern corresponding to “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is determined in step U916 and set as a variation pattern command. Turn off all other flags. Thereafter, in step U917, symbols other than back and forth are set as symbol commands, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  If a negative determination is made in step U915, that is, if it is “completely out”, an outlier variation pattern is determined in step U918 and set in a variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U919, the completely off symbol is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  When the fluctuation pattern at the time of “out” is determined in step U913, step U916, and step U918, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. This is the same as Step U904 and Step U907. For example, in the case of a complete departure (C3 = 22 to 238), when the total number of holdings is “0” to “2” in the “normal mode” regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. , “FF09” corresponding to “completely out (10 s)” is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and when “total mode” is “3” or more in “normal mode”, it corresponds to “completely out (5 s)” “FF08” is set.

  In addition, the symbol commands in steps U914, U917, and U919 indicate a predetermined division of the combination of symbols that are out of the same manner as in steps U905 and U908. Specifically, when “A3” indicating the combination of the front and rear off symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command stores the front and rear stored in the front and rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment reach is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” indicating a combination of symbols other than the front / rear detachment is set in the symbol command, the sub-control unit displays a combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than the front / rear detachment stored in the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. 262 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” indicating a combination of completely disconnected symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 uses the combination of symbols stored in the completely disconnected symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

  In step U920, start setting processing is performed to indicate that a condition for performing switching display (variation display) is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and the first display timer setting process is performed. The first display timer is a means for measuring the variation time (residual time for variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation display. . In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the first display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43L and 43R, switching display (variation display) is started. The special display devices 43L and 43R are 7-segment display devices as described above. If the displayed character is “−”, it is “7”, if it is “7”, it is “3”, and if it is “3”. “2”, “2” is “1”, “1” is “0”, “0” is “−” (however, regarding the second special display device 42R, “2”, “ “1” is not displayed, and if the displayed character is “3”, the display is switched to “0”). Then, after step U920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 45, if an affirmative determination is made in step U802, that is, if a variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step U812 to perform a first display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step U813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step U813.

  If a negative determination is made in step U813, in step U817, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process ends. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, "7" if the currently displayed character is "-", "3" if "7", "2" if "3", "1" if "2" "," 1 "is set to" 0 "," 0 "is set to"-"(however, regarding the second special display device 43R," 3 "is set to" 0 "). . Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U813, the first display flag is released (turned off) in step U814, and stop display setting is performed in step U815 to perform stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R. . Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. In other words, when “probability big hit” with transition to “probability change mode” is displayed, “7” is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and “normal big hit” with transition to “time reduction mode” is displayed. In some cases, “3” is stopped and displayed, “2” is stopped when “probability big hit” with transition to “probability change mode” is displayed, and “JUB big win with change to“ probability change mode ”is displayed. "1" is stopped and displayed, "0" is stopped and displayed when it is "small hit", and "-" is stopped and displayed when it is off. Again, such a stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary.

  Subsequently, after the discrimination information setting process is performed in step U816, the present process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U1001, the big hit winning flag and the small win winning flag are taken into consideration to determine whether or not the stop display corresponds to a big win or a small win. Here, in the case of corresponding to a big hit or a small win, the process proceeds to step U1002, and a hit setting is performed. Specifically, setting processing of a big hit / medium flag, a small hit / medium flag, a first variable flag, a first variable timer, an opening number counter, a winning counter, and the like is performed. And after completion | finish of step U1002, a discrimination | determination information setting process is complete | finished.

  The big hit flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the big hit state is being set. Here, “1” indicating the occurrence of the big hit state is set (turned on) as a flag value.

  The small hitting flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the small hitting state is in effect, and here, similarly to the big hitting medium flag, “1” indicating the occurrence of the small hitting state is set as the flag value. (Turned on).

  The first variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is in an open state.

  The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time (occurrence time of the special prize state) of the variable winning device 32, the interval between the special prize states, and the like, and is defined from the opening start or opening end of the opening / closing member 32a. This is taken into account when determining whether or not time has elapsed. In the hit setting process in step U1002 in the present embodiment, “7500” or “100” is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32a is set to “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”. In the present embodiment, “7500” is set in the first variable timer in the case of “long open”, and “100” is set in the first variable timer in the case of “short open”.

  The opening number counter is used to determine the number of occurrences of the special prize state executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed (“long open” or “short open”). In the hit setting process at step U1002 in this embodiment, “10” indicating 10 times is set as the counter value.

  The winning counter is a winning counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In the present embodiment, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32 based on the value of the ball determination flag corresponding to the count switch 223. When it is determined that there is a ball entering the winning device 32, the value of the winning counter Vx is incremented by one.

  In the hit setting process in step U1002, the specified number K1 that is the maximum expected number of balls to be entered into the variable winning device 32 per one opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing member 32a is set. As described above, the prescribed number K1 is determined in advance for each opening type (operating mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation) such as “long opening” or “short opening”. For example, “10” is set as the specified number K1 if “long open”, and “1” is set as the specified number K1 if “short open”. Note that a scheduled number-of-entry determination table (see FIG. 54) that defines the correspondence between the release type and the maximum number of planned entries (specified number K1) is stored in the ROM 502, and is referred to when performing such setting processing. The

  If it is determined in step U1001 that the jackpot or the jackpot does not correspond, that is, the jackpot winning flag and the jackpot winning flag are off, the process proceeds to step U1003.

  In step U1003, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0”. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed). As described later, “100” is set as the counter value after the “normal jackpot” is completed.

  If the counter value of the variation counter is “0”, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (when the counter value is other than “0”), it is considered that the time reduction state is being set, and in step U1004, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1. The process proceeds to step U1005.

  In step U1005, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the 100th variation display after the end of the “normal jackpot” (after the provision of the time reduction state). Here, if the value of the variation counter is “0”, a process of turning off a high-ball entering state flag, which will be described later, is performed in step U1006, and a process of turning off a time shortening state flag, which will be described later, is performed in step U1007. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step U1005 that the counter value of the variation counter is not “0”, this process is terminated.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step U206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The function of the variable winning device control process constitutes the opening / closing control means in this embodiment.

  First, in step U1201, it is determined whether or not the big hit / medium flag is on. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1202, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the first variable timer in the subsequent step U1202.

  In the following step U1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made here, that is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step U1204, whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is “0”, that is, 1 of the opening / closing member 32a. It is determined whether or not an open time (specified time “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”) per opening / closing operation (“long open” or “short open”) remains.

  If a negative determination is made in step U1204, the process proceeds to step U1205, and whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the prescribed number K1, that is, the game ball that won the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of balls has reached the maximum planned number of balls (the prescribed number “10” or “1”). If a negative determination is made in step U1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize-winning device 32 (the timing for finishing the special prize state) has not yet arrived, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U1204 or step U1205, the process proceeds to step U1206, where the first variable timer and determination value K2 are set.

  Here, the first variable timer includes whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the big win or the small prize, In this embodiment, a value “750” corresponding to “3 seconds” is set to determine whether or not an interval until the special prize state is started.

  The determination value K2 is a value for determining whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 in a single special prize state (including the predetermined time after completion of the special prize state) is appropriate. It is. The determination value K2 is determined in advance for each opening type (operating mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation) such as “long opening” or “short opening”. For example, “13” is set as the determination value K2 if “long open”, and “3” is set as the determination value K2 if “short open”. Note that a determination value determination table (see FIG. 54) as a determination value storage unit that defines the correspondence between the open type and the determination value K2 is stored in the ROM 502, and is referred to when performing such setting processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step U1207, whether the counter value of the release number counter is “0”, that is, whether the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has reached the prescribed number of 10 times. Determine whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1207, it is determined in step U1208 whether or not the JUB flag is on, thereby determining whether or not the variable winning device control process corresponds to “JUB jackpot”. Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1208, a setting change process is performed in step U1209, and this process ends.

  In the setting change process in step U1209, the specified number K1 related to one special prize state is changed from “1” corresponding to “short open” to “10” corresponding to “long open”. In addition, the value of the release number counter is set to “9”. Thus, in the case of “JUB jackpot”, as described above, a maximum of 10 “short releases” are performed in the first round, and “long releases” are performed in the second to tenth rounds, respectively. It will be.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1208, an open end setting process is performed in step U1210, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process of step U1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the hit end flag is turned on.

  If a negative determination is made in step U1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has not reached the specified number, a special prize feed process is performed in step U1211, and this process is performed. finish.

  In the special prize feed process of step U1211, the value of the release number counter is decremented by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. Thus, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

  If a negative determination is made in step U1203, that is, if it is within a predetermined time after completion of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after completion of winning or during an interval between special prize states), the process proceeds to step U1212. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1212, that is, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state and the timing for proceeding to the next process (the start of the next special prize state or the start of the normal game) has been reached. Then, the process proceeds to step U1213. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1212, the present process ends.

  In step U1213, whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or larger than the determination value K2, that is, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 223 in one special prize state is an abnormal number (“13” or “3 It is determined whether or not the number of “pieces” has been reached. The processing function according to step U1213 constitutes an abnormality determination unit in the present embodiment.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1213, the abnormality notification setting process is performed in step U1214, and then the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1213, the process proceeds to step U1215.

  In the abnormality notification setting process in step U1214, a setting process (notification process) for notifying that there is an abnormality (entering error) is performed. For example, in the present embodiment, settings for outputting a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 to the sub-control device 262, settings for outputting an error signal to the hall computer of the game hall, and the like are performed. Based on this, the command is output to the sub-control device 262 in the above-described external output processing of the normal processing, and the sub-control device 262 controls the blinking of the error display lamp 104. The error display lamp 104, the external relay terminal plate 240 that outputs a ball entry error signal, and the like constitute notification means in the present embodiment.

  In step U1215, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit state or the small hit state by referring to the hit end flag.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1215, a hit end setting process is performed in step U1216, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1215, the special prize state start process is performed in step U1217, and then this process ends.

  In the hit end setting process in step U1216, the big hit / small hit flag is turned off, the high probability state flag setting process, the time shortening state flag setting process, the high entry state flag setting process, and the variation counter Setting processing, mode switching command setting processing, and the like are performed.

  The high probability state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high probability state. In the high probability state flag setting process, the above-described “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “ Based on the “probability flag” and the “JUB flag”, the high probability state flag is switched. As a result, when the probability variation mode is set after the jackpot is ended (the “probability variation flag”, “surprise probability flag”, or “JUB flag” is on), “1” indicating the occurrence of a high probability state is set as the flag value. When the “time reduction mode” is set (“normal flag” is on), “0” indicating the occurrence of the low probability state is set as the flag value.

  The time reduction state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a time reduction state. In the time reduction state flag setting process, the above-described “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “ Based on the “probability flag” and the “JUB flag”, the time reduction state flag is switched. As a result, when the time reduction state is set after the jackpot is ended (the “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “surprise probability flag”, or “JUB flag” is on), “ “1” is set as the flag value.

  The high entry state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high entry state. In the high entry state flag setting process, the above-described “probability change flag”, “normal flag” ”,“ Probability flag ”, and“ JUB flag ”are set to switch the high pitching state flag. As a result, when the high pitching state is set after the end of the jackpot (the “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “probability flag” or “JUB flag” is on), the high pitching state is generated. “1” shown is set as the flag value.

  The mode determination by the main controller 261 in the present embodiment is performed by a combination of the above-described high probability state flag, time reduction state flag, and high entry state flag on / off state. For example, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitching state flag are all on (flag value “1”), it is determined as “probability change mode”. Further, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitching state flag are all in an off state (flag value “0”), it is determined that the mode is “normal mode”. If only the high probability state flag is off and the time shortening state flag and the high pitching state flag are on, it is determined that the time shortening mode is set.

  The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the variation counter setting process, the high probability state flag setting process and Similarly, switching setting of the variation counter is performed based on the “probability change flag” or the like. As a result, when the time reduction mode is set (usually a big hit), “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter.

  Note that the “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “probability flag”, and “JUB flag” are turned off after the high probability state flag setting process or the like.

  The mode switching command is a command for instructing the sub-control device 262 to switch the game mode (“normal mode”, “probability change mode”, or “time reduction mode”). The command includes mode information related to a new game mode that is grasped by the mode discrimination. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that has received this switches the game mode that it has grasped to a new game mode. Alternatively, the mode switching command may be omitted, and instead of this, for example, the mode information may be included in an ending command or the like that notifies the end of the jackpot state.

  In the special prize state start process of step U1217, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time (“7500” or “100”) corresponding to the opening type is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter Vx is further set. The value of is reset to “0”.

  Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  Next, the second display control process in step U207 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In FIG. 49, in step U2101, the normal symbol display device 41 is in the switching display (variable display) while looking at the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing the variable display. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the display stop state is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step U2101, the process proceeds to step U2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the variable display is not being performed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc> 0, the process proceeds to step U2103. In step U2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step U2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step U2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the second display timer flag is turned on, and the second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Is done. In the present embodiment, in the “normal mode”, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is 2 seconds, “500” is set in the second display timer. In the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode”, “100” is set in the second display timer. Based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process, the normal symbol display is performed. Switching display is started in the device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step U2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U2101, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step U2106 to perform a second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step U2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step U2107, the second display flag is turned off in step U2108, and a normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step U2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation holding area. Specifically, “5-153” is the winning value among the numerical values 0-250 of the normal symbol random number counter C4.

  Then, it progresses to step U2110, a normal symbol discrimination | determination information setting process is performed, and this process is complete | finished. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing the opening / closing process of the start winning unit 33 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on, and the release time is set in the second variable timer.

  The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state.

  The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the start winning unit 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening start. In this embodiment, the opening time of the start winning unit 33 is different between the high pitching state (“probability change mode” and “time reduction mode”) and the low pitching state (“normal mode”), and the high pitching state. In this case, “1000” is set for the second variable timer, and “100” is set for the second variable timer in the low pitching state.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U2107, in step U2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity handling unit control processing in step U208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step U2201, it is determined whether or not a second variable flag indicating whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state is ON. Here, when it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the start winning unit 33 is in the closed state), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is considered that the start winning unit 33 is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step U2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step U2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the prescribed opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes “0”, the determination at step U2203 is affirmative. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U2203, the process proceeds to step U2204, and an end setting process is performed in step U2204, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step U2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

  Various control signals are output to the start winning unit 33 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the start winning unit 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the starting winning unit 33 is closed (the opening / closing member 33c is closed). , It is impossible to enter the game ball into the lower winning award 33b).

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step U3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step U3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In the following step U3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, the received command is first read from the command buffer of the RAM 553. Subsequently, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, a return command, a variation pattern command, or a mode switching command.

  Here, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an initialization command, the main control device 261 has instructed initialization of the RAM 553 when the power is turned on. Therefore, the RAM 553 is cleared and the RAM 553 is initialized. Set the value. Thus, mode information (for example, “FF”) corresponding to the “normal mode” that is the initial setting is stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553.

  In addition, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a return command, the main control device 261 returns to the state before power-off, so the sub-control device 262 that does not have a backup function is included in the return command. The mode information (for example, mode information “FD” corresponding to “probability change mode”) is read and stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a variation pattern command, mode information included in the variation pattern command (for example, mode information “FD” corresponding to “probability variation mode”) is read and the mode information Are compared with the mode information stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553. Here, mode information included in the variation pattern command (for example, mode information “FD” corresponding to “probability change mode”) and mode information stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553 (for example, mode information corresponding to “normal mode”). "FF"), and if both mode information is different, the setting process related to mode error notification is performed.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a mode switching command, it is the timing at which the main control device 261 switches the game mode, so the mode information included in the mode switching command (for example, the “probability change mode”). Corresponding mode information “FD”) is read out and stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 51, after step U3903 or when a negative determination is made in step U3901, the process proceeds to step U3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step U3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step U3912.

  In step U3905, various counter updating processes are executed. Similar to the first embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative symbols. However, in the present embodiment, the chance symbol that is stopped and displayed in the case of “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit” is a combination of decorative symbols (“3”, “4”, “1”). For this reason, it is not necessary to use counter information when displaying decorative symbols.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 51, display setting processing is performed in step U3907. In this processing, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed based on information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. More specifically, the sub-control device 262 determines a display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on a table that associates the variation type of the decorative symbol with the variation pattern command, and corresponds to the variation time of the variation pattern command. Set the value to the variable time timer.

  In the display setting process in step U3907, the stop symbol is also determined based on the symbol command. As described above, when “A1” is set in the symbol command, any combination of symbols 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A3” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553 is determined as the stop symbol. When “A4” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely off symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol. When “A6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped. Determine as.

  Furthermore, in the display setting process of step U3907, the mode switching setting process is also performed. The mode switching setting process is a process for setting a display command for causing the display control device 45 to execute a process for performing the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 in a mode corresponding to the type of the game mode.

  The display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is appropriately switched in color tone of the background image according to the game mode based on the mode information stored in the mode information storage area. Specifically, in the “normal mode”, the background image has a colorful full color scheme using a plurality of colors. In the “probability change mode”, the background image has a reddish monotone color scheme, and in the “time reduction mode”, the background image has a greenish second monotone color scheme.

  In the lamp setting process of step U3908, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the audio setting process of step U3909, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice command such as an error notification is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step U3909.

  In step U3910, other processing such as control setting of a waiting-for-waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state in which the decorative symbol display device 42 has not been changed) is performed. Do.

  In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps U3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps U3905 to U3911 performed every 1 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step U3904, the process proceeds to step U3912, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If no power off occurrence information is stored, the process advances to step U3913 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. Here, if the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to the process of step U3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step U3912 that the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is stored, power supply interruption processing is executed in step U3914. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, a game ball (game detected by the count switch 223) that has won the variable winning device 32 during one special prize state (including a predetermined time after the special prize state ends). When the number of balls exceeds the appropriate range, an abnormality notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to early detect and suppress fraudulent acts such as a radio wave attack on the variable winning device 32 without providing a radio wave detection sensor.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a determination value K2 for determining an abnormality in the number of balls entered is determined for each open type (“long open” or “short open”). As a result, it is possible to cope with various hit types while suppressing an increase in the number of data storage, compared to a configuration in which determination values for abnormality determination are stored for various hit types such as big hits and small hits. Can do. Also, without waiting for the end of a special game state such as a big win or a small win, an abnormality determination can be made every time the special prize state ends, and an illegal act can be detected early and consequently suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the opening / closing member 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state, the abnormality determination is performed including the value counted during the closed state (for example, during the interval). When the number of balls detected by the count switch 223 reaches the specified number even if the "radio wave" as described in the above "problems to be solved by the invention" is performed during the open state of the opening / closing member 32a Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32a ends properly. In other words, as a case where the radio wave is performed on the variable winning device 32, there is a high possibility that it is performed while the opening / closing member 32a is in the closed state. In addition, during a predetermined time after the opening / closing member 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state (such as during an interval), the ball is properly entered into the variable winning device 32 just before the opening / closing member 32a is closed, but still detected by the count switch 223. Since it is necessary to wait for detection of an unplayed game ball (remaining ball), the detection process by the count switch 223 cannot be stopped. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to more reliably detect fraudulent acts such as radio waves that are easily performed on the variable winning device 32.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In each of the above-described embodiments, a through-type proximity switch is employed as various ball detection switches such as the prize opening switch 221. The type of the entrance detection switch is not limited to this. For example, another non-contact type switch such as a photo switch or a contact type switch such as a micro switch may be employed. For example, by inserting a wire or the like into the ball detection switch and turning the ball detection switch on and off, the game ball does not actually enter the ball entry means in the same way as “radio wave” etc. If the ball enters the ball, an illegal act of causing the ball detection switch to erroneously detect the ball may be performed. Therefore, the present invention is effective even for the ball detection switch that is not easily affected by radio waves.

  (B) In each of the above-described embodiments, at a normal time when the game ball does not pass through the through hole such as the prize opening switch 221 or the like, a + 12V high level signal (H) is output from the prize opening switch 221 or the like, and the main control device On the 261 side, a low level signal (L) having a reference potential of 0 V is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229. On the other hand, while a game ball enters the general prize opening 31 and the like and the game ball passes through a passage hole such as the prize opening switch 221, a low level signal (L) is output from the prize opening switch 221 and the like. The high level signal (H) is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229 on the main controller 261 side.

  For example, the inverting circuit 229 may be omitted, and the signal output from the winning prize switch 221 or the like may be input to the CPU 501 as it is.

  Further, during normal times when the game ball is not passing, a low level signal (L) is output from the prize opening switch 221 and the like, and while the game ball is passing through the passage hole, the high level from the prize opening switch 221 and the like is output. The level signal (H) may be output.

  (C) In each of the above embodiments, when performing the ball entry determination process, the logic inversion process is performed on the earliest data of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer, and the logic inversion is performed. The logical product of all the remaining data and the remaining two data is calculated, and determination processing is performed based on the calculation result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same processing may be performed based on at least two times of data stored in the signal level buffer. Alternatively, the logical inversion processing of the earliest data may be omitted, and a logical product of data for a plurality of times may be simply calculated.

  (D) In the first embodiment, in detecting the “first radio wave goto”, the number of times that an abnormality is detected such that the detection start interval is 36 msec or less is counted, and the number of times is 50 times. Only when it becomes above, it becomes the structure which notifies an error. The number of conditions for performing error notification is not limited to 50, but may be a different value. Further, the abnormality count counter may be omitted, and an error notification may be provided every time an abnormality is determined to be present.

  In the second embodiment, an error notification is made when an abnormality determination is made once that the number of game balls won in the variable prize winning device 32 exceeds the appropriate range during one special prize state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, provided with an abnormal count counter as an abnormal number storage means capable of storing the number of times determined to be abnormal, and when the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value after the end of the jackpot It may be configured to output a ball entry error signal to the hall computer.

  (E) The elapsed time measuring means is not limited to the abnormality monitoring timer CT in the first embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, a timer for detecting the “first radio wave goto” and a timer for detecting the “second radio goto” may be separately provided. Further, instead of the abnormality monitoring timer CT, for example, one count is added to a predetermined counter every 2 msec period of the switch reading process, and when the value reaches 500, it may be determined that 1 second has elapsed. .

  (F) In each of the embodiments described above, an error notification is provided as a process when an abnormality is detected. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, a process for canceling a determination that there is a ball entry or a game ball A process for canceling the payout control, a process for deleting the hold data, a process for stopping the launch of the game ball, and the like may be performed.

  (G) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from said each embodiment. In addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball can be implemented.

  (H) In each of the above-described embodiments, the error display lamp 104 is caused to emit light as an abnormality notification related to the radio wave, and a ball entry error signal is output from the external relay terminal board 240 to the hall computer of the game hall. . The notification means is not limited to these, and for example, sound generation means such as a speaker SP, various display means such as a decorative symbol display device 42, and the like may be employed.

  (I) In the second embodiment, the arrangement of the jackpot type is different between the case where a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a and the case where a game ball enters the lower winning opening 33b. However, it may be reversed.

  The contents of the jackpot type are not limited to those in the second embodiment. For example, after the jackpot, a jackpot (latency probability changing jackpot) that provides a later-described latent probability changing mode may be provided.

  (J) In the second embodiment, the “normal mode”, the “probability change mode”, and the “time reduction mode” can be set as the game mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another mode may be set. For example, a configuration in which a state in which the high probability mode is assigned is difficult for the player to recognize, that is, a “latency probability variation mode” that is a latent state may be provided.

  Here, the “latent probability change mode” refers to a state (for example, 1/30) in which the jackpot probability after the jackpot is increased as compared with the “probability change mode” compared to the “normal mode”. In addition, the “latency probability change mode” may be continued until the next big hit state occurs, similarly to the “probability change mode”. However, in the “latency probability changing mode”, the jackpot probability is merely increased, and the others are not different from those in the “normal mode” on the surface. In other words, unlike the “probability change mode”, the game display ball is frequently entered into the start winning unit 33 (the lower winning opening 33b) instead of being in a time shortening state in which the variable display time in the special display devices 43L and 43R is short. It will not be a high pitched state where the ball is sphered. That is, the “latency probability changing mode” corresponds to a high probability mode in which a time shortening state and a high pitching state are not added. Therefore, under the second embodiment, when only the high probability state flag is on and the time reduction state flag and the high ball entering state flag are off, it is possible to determine the “latency probability change mode”.

  (K) In the second embodiment, the determination value K2 for determining the abnormality in the number of balls is determined for each opening type (“long opening” or “short opening”) of the opening / closing member 32a. Not limited to this, for example, a determination value for abnormality determination is stored for each hit type (or for each round), and the number of game balls won in a plurality of special prize states is determined at the end of hit (or at the end of each round) It is good also as a structure to determine to.

  In the second embodiment, the number of entered balls is determined to be abnormal every time one special prize state is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which performs abnormality determination of the number of balls. In such a case, for example, the determination value K (for example, “13”) corresponding to the open type (for example, “long open”) of the special prize state and the special prize state executed during a predetermined hit state (or during each round). Based on the determination value (for example, “13 pieces” × “10 times”) obtained by multiplying the number of executions, abnormality determination of the number of balls entered at the end of the hit state (or at the end of each round) It is good also as a structure to perform.

  In the second embodiment, a specified time elapses or a specified number of game balls wins after the open / close member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state in various winning states. For each opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing member 32a, such that one opening / closing operation until the closed state is taken as one special prize state and this is repeated a plurality of times (multiple rounds). A prescribed number K1 that is the maximum expected number of balls to enter the variable winning device 32 is set. For example, in the configuration in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32a is performed a plurality of times during one round, such as the first round of “JUB jackpot”, for example, a prescribed number is set for each round. Also good. In other words, a predetermined number of special award states in which a prescribed number that is the maximum expected number of balls entering the variable winning device 32 is set as one round. Similarly, in the case where “short opening” is set to one special prize state, such as “surprise big hit” or “small win”, a plurality of special prize states (for example, ten times) may be regarded as one round. .

  Hereinafter, another example of the variable winning device control process (see FIG. 48) of step U206 under the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Detailed description of the same components as those in the above embodiment will be omitted.

  First, in step H1201, it is determined whether or not the big hit / medium flag is small. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1201, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the first variable timer in the subsequent step H1202.

  In the subsequent step H1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step H1204.

  In step H1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than a specified number K3. In the predetermined number K3, the maximum expected number of balls for one round is set in the discrimination information setting process (step U816) or the like. For example, “10” is set if “probability big hit” or “normal big hit”. Further, if the first round of “JUB big hit”, “surprise big hit” or “small hit”, “5” is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1204, the process proceeds to step H1205, whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is “0”, that is, one open / close operation (“long open” or “short open” of the open / close member 32a). It is determined whether or not an open time (specified time “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”) remains.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (timing for the end of the special prize state) has not yet arrived, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step H1205, the process proceeds to step H1206.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1204, the process proceeds to step H1220 to determine whether or not the long release flag is on. The long release flag is a flag for determining whether or not the opening / closing operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a is “long open”. If it is, it means that it is “short open”. The long release flag is appropriately set to ON / OFF when the opening / closing operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a is set, such as the determination information setting process (step U816).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1220, the process proceeds to step H1206. If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step H1208.

  In step H1206, the first variable timer and determination value K2 are set.

  Here, the first variable timer includes whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the big win or the small prize, In this embodiment, a value “750” corresponding to “3 seconds” is set to determine whether or not an interval until the special prize state is started.

  The determination value K2 is a value for determining whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 in a single special prize state (including the predetermined time after completion of the special prize state) is appropriate. It is. The determination value K2 is determined in advance for each opening type (operating mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation) such as “long opening” or “short opening”. For example, “13” is set as the determination value K2 if “long open”, and “3” is set as the determination value K2 if “short open”. Note that a determination value determination table (see FIG. 54) as a determination value storage unit that defines the correspondence between the open type and the determination value K2 is stored in the ROM 502, and is referred to when performing such setting processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step H1207, whether or not the counter value of the release number counter is “0”, that is, whether or not the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has reached the prescribed number of 10 times. Determine whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1207, it is determined in step H1208 whether or not the JUB flag is on, thereby determining whether or not the variable winning device control process corresponds to “JUB jackpot”. Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1208, a setting change process is performed in step H1209, and this process ends.

  In the setting change process in step H1209, the specified number K3 is changed from “5” corresponding to 10 “short open” to “10” corresponding to one “long open”. In addition, the value of the release number counter is set to “9”. Further, the long release flag is turned on. Thus, in the case of “JUB jackpot”, as described above, a maximum of 10 “short releases” are performed in the first round, and “long releases” are performed in the second to tenth rounds, respectively. It will be.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1208, an open end setting process is performed in step H1210, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process of step H1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the hit end flag is turned on.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has not reached the specified number of times, a special prize feed process is performed in step H1211, and this process is performed. finish.

  In the special prize feed process of step H1211, the value of the release number counter is decremented by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. Thus, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1203, that is, if it is within a predetermined time after completion of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after completion of winning or during an interval between special prize states), the process proceeds to step H1212. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1212, that is, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state, and the timing for proceeding to the next process (the start of the next special prize state or the start of the normal game) has been reached. Then, the process proceeds to step H1213. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1212, the present process is terminated as it is.

  In Step H1213, whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or larger than the determination value K2, that is, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 223 in one special prize state is an abnormal number (“13” or “3 It is determined whether or not the number of “pieces” has been reached.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1213, the abnormality notification setting process is performed in step H1214, and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1213, the process proceeds to step H1215.

  In the abnormality notification setting process in step H1214, a setting process (notification process) for notifying that there is an abnormality (entrance error) is performed.

  In Step H1215, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit state or the small hit state with reference to the hit end flag.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1215, a hit end setting process is performed in step H1216, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1215, the special prize state start process is performed in step H1217, and then this process is terminated.

  In the hit end setting process of step H1216, the big hit / small hit flag is turned off, the high probability state flag setting process, the time shortening state flag setting process, the high pitching state flag setting process, and the variation counter Setting processing, mode switching command setting processing, and the like are performed.

  In the special prize state start process of step H1217, the first variable flag is turned on, the release time (“7500” or “100”) corresponding to the release type is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter Vx The value of is reset to “0”.

  According to the above configuration, the specified number K3 which is the maximum expected number of entries to the variable winning device 32 per round is monitored in round units, whereas the number of entries detected by the count switch 223 is abnormal. The value (determination value K2) is monitored for each special prize state. For this reason, in the case of the first round of “JUB big hit”, “surprise big hit” or “small hit”, the stage before the number of balls detected by the count switch 223 reaches the specified number K3, that is, one round is completed. In the previous stage, it becomes possible to detect an abnormality (ball entry error). As a result, fraud can be detected early.

  Of course, even in the configuration in which the prescribed number that is the maximum expected number of entries to the variable winning device 32 is set in a big hit unit, the abnormal value (determination value K2) of the number of entries detected by the count switch 223 is once. If each special prize state (or round) is monitored, the same effect can be obtained.

  (L) The opening type of the opening / closing member 32a is not limited to the two types of “long opening” and “short opening” in the second embodiment. For example, it may be configured to have three or more types of opening, such as “intermediate opening” having a shorter opening time than “long opening” and longer opening time than “short opening”. Further, for example, a configuration in which the opening / closing operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a is switched in three or more patterns during one hit state such as “JUB big hit” (a configuration in which three or more types of opening are performed) may be employed.

  Further, as a difference in the operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a, not only the prescribed time required for one opening / closing operation is different, but instead of or in addition, for example, the opening angle of the opening / closing member 32a is different (for example, half-opening). The movement itself of the opening / closing member 32a may be different.

  (M) A configuration may be adopted in which a switch reading process different from the switch reading process according to each of the above-described embodiments (see FIGS. 13 and 39) can be executed.

  For example, in the first embodiment, each time the switch reading process is executed, the series of processes in steps S413 to S418 is always executed. However, in order to reduce the processing load, the series of processes is performed. It is good also as a structure which is not performed every time.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 56, after the processing in step S407 is performed, it is determined in step S4071 whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is “0” or more. That is, it is determined whether or not measurement by the abnormality monitoring timer CT is being executed (including the case where the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is “0”). Here, when an affirmative determination is made, the processes of steps S413 to S418 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4071, this processing is terminated as it is.

  (N) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiments, the valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the count switch 223 is valid may be limited to a predetermined time from the start of the special prize state. In this way, it is possible to further suppress “radio waves”.

  Hereinafter, the technical idea that is not described in the claims and that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described together with the effects thereof.

Means 0. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
Entry means arranged in the game area;
An entrance detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered into the entrance means;
By providing an abnormality determination means capable of determining the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality based on the detection result of the entrance detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined abnormality caused by a predetermined radio wave goto can be detected without referring to a detection result of the predetermined radio wave detection means (without providing a radio wave detection means).

  Conventionally, measures such as providing a radio wave detection sensor (radio wave detection means) in the gaming machine are taken in order to prevent the “radio waves” as described in the above “problem to be solved by the invention”.

  However, when it is intended to cover the entire gaming area where a plurality of entrance means are arranged with one radio wave detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor with a wide detection range must be used, and radio waves that are not related to unauthorized radio waves are used. May be detected. On the other hand, when a radio wave detection sensor with a narrow detection range is provided corresponding to each ball entry means, there is a risk of increasing the number of parts, complicating the mounting structure, complicating electrical wiring, and the like.

  On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means 0, it is possible to detect and suppress early acts of fraud such as radio wave goto with respect to the ball entry means without providing a radio wave detection sensor.

Means 1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
Entry means arranged in the game area;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising control means for monitoring the signal output from the entrance detection means and performing predetermined control,
The entrance detection means continuously outputs a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) during non-detection of a game ball, and outputs a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) during detection of a game ball. Output continuously,
The control means includes
A signal monitoring means for periodically monitoring the signal level input from the entrance detection means;
Based on the switching of the signal level input from the entrance detection means, at least entrance determination means capable of determining that a game ball has entered the entrance means,
An elapsed time measuring means capable of measuring an elapsed time from a time when there is a ball entered by the ball entering judging means (when a switching from a first level signal to a second level signal is detected) to a predetermined trigger;
An abnormality determining means capable of determining the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality based on the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means;
A gaming machine comprising: notifying means capable of notifying that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the abnormality determination by the abnormality determining means.

  According to the means 1, the signal level input from the entrance detection means is monitored to make the entrance determination, and the elapsed time from the predetermined entrance presence determination time to the predetermined trigger is measured, and the elapsed time By performing the abnormality determination based on the above, it is possible to appropriately detect a predetermined abnormality such that, for example, a predetermined switching point of the signal level comes at a timing earlier or later than an appropriate time interval. As a result, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as radio wave goats and suppress them without providing a radio wave detection sensor.

  Further, by providing the notifying means, it is possible for a person related to the game hall or the like to know that some abnormality has occurred, such as an illegal act being performed on the incoming ball detecting means. As a result, it leads to early detection of fraud. Examples of the notification means include light emission means such as a lamp, sound generation means such as a speaker, display means, and an external output means such as an external terminal board that outputs a signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

  Examples of the “predetermined opportunity” include “when it is determined that there is a next entry”, “when reaching a predetermined maximum measurement time” of elapsed time measuring means such as a timer, and the like. In addition, as the “predetermined control” performed by the “control means”, for example, payout control of game balls, lottery control for determining whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and display for variably displaying identification information For example, control.

  Further, according to this means, it is possible to perform an appropriate process according to each incoming means as compared with the case where a plurality of incoming means are monitored by one radio wave detection sensor. For example, when it is determined that there is an abnormality with respect to a specific incoming ball detecting means, only processing related to the specific incoming ball detecting means is stopped, so that processing related to other incoming ball detecting means is greatly affected. Without giving, it is also possible to take a measure corresponding only to a specific fraud aimed at a specific entry detecting means. As a result, it is possible to take an appropriate response to various radio waves and efficiently suppress radio waves.

Mean 2. The elapsed time measuring means is configured to be capable of measuring an elapsed time from at least a predetermined entry determination to the next entry determination.
The abnormality determination means is configured to be able to determine that there is an abnormality when at least the elapsed time is shorter than a preset specified time (first specified time),
An abnormality number storage means capable of storing the number of times determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination means;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notification means notifies the fact when the number of times that the abnormality is determined becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

  Generally, when a game ball enters a ball entry means and a second level signal is output, the output time (signal duration) is about several msec to 30 msec at the latest. Also, even if two game balls are entered into the entrance means so as to be connected, from the end of detection of the first entered game ball to the start of detection of the second entered game ball, It takes about 30 msec. Accordingly, the elapsed time from the first time point when it is determined that there is a ball entering the ball entry means to the second time point when it is determined that there is a ball entering the ball entry means is a specified time (for example, 40 msec). If it is extremely short as follows, there is a high possibility that the radio wave has been carried out by the method exemplified in the above “problem to be solved by the invention”.

  However, as described above, even when an abnormality is detected in which the interval between two game balls is less than the specified time, if the number of detections is small (for example, only once) There is also a possibility that the problem is simply an accident due to noise or the like. On the other hand, if a large number of such abnormalities are detected, there is a high possibility of fraud.

  In addition, when the radio wave detection sensor is used, the radio wave detected by the radio wave detection sensor includes many radio waves that are unrelated to the radio wave noise such as radio wave noises emitted from various electronic devices. If uniform processing is performed until such radio noise is detected, it will not be an appropriate countermeasure against radio goto, but will also bring unexpected disadvantages to players unrelated to radio goto There is also a fear.

  In this regard, according to the above-described means 2, it is possible to determine that the radio wave has been performed by the above-described method, and it is possible to suppress the radio wave. Furthermore, accidental factors can be eliminated as much as possible, and the determination accuracy of the radio wave can be improved. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to a true fraud, and the fraud can be efficiently prevented. As a result, it is possible for the game hall to avoid unnecessary troubles with the player, such as not issuing an alarm unnecessarily, and to manage the hall smoothly.

Means 3. The elapsed time measuring means has elapsed from at least a predetermined entry determination to a determination that there is no entry related to the entry determination (when switching from a second level signal to a first level signal is detected). It is configured to be able to measure time (including when it reaches a predetermined maximum measurement time)
The abnormality determining means is configured to be capable of determining that there is an abnormality when at least the elapsed time is longer than a preset second specified time,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the abnormality determining means determines that there is an abnormality, the notification means notifies that fact.

  “Radio Goto” includes, for example, a legitimate act that separates the level signal output based on the detection of a game ball that actually passes through the ball detection means as described above and increases the number of detections. A method using a game ball having a diameter larger than that of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “illegal large ball”) is also conceivable. In such a case, an illegal large sphere is first placed in the ball passage in advance by entering the ball entry means. If it does so, the said illegal large sphere will be in the state caught in the said passage hole, without being able to pass the passage hole of an entrance detection means. As a result, the incoming ball detecting means is always in an ON state (a state in which the second level signal is output) in which an illegal large ball is detected. In this state, by appropriately transmitting an improper radio wave that turns the ball detection means off (the state in which the first level signal is output), the on / off state is switched, even though the game ball has not passed, It can be erroneously detected that a game ball has passed.

  As described above, the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage hole of the entrance detection means (continuous output time of the second level signal) is about several msec to 30 msec at the latest. That is, if the second level signal is continuously output for a second specified time (for example, 1 second) continuously from the time when it is determined that there is a ball entering the ball entry means, There is a high possibility that cheating by a ball is being carried out.

  In this regard, according to the means 3, it is possible to determine that the radio wave using the illegal large sphere has been performed, and it is possible to suppress the radio wave.

  In addition, the radio wave that increases the number of detections by dividing the level signal that is output based on the detection of the game ball that actually passes through the entrance detection means in the previous stage, the game ball actually passes through the entrance detection means Incorrect radio waves must be inserted at the same time, which is difficult to execute. On the other hand, since the method using the illegal sphere at the latter stage is relatively easy to execute, providing a means for suppressing such an illegal act is more effective as a countermeasure against radio waves.

  In addition, since the second specified time necessary for determining an illegal act using an illegal large sphere is relatively long, it is assumed that the signal level is set to determine whether or not the second specified time has been reached. If a configuration is employed in which information is periodically stored and a determination is made based on these level information, the processing burden on the arithmetic processing may become extremely large. On the other hand, if a timer or the like is used as the elapsed time measuring means, the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, the measurement of the “elapsed time from the time of determination of the presence of a predetermined entry to the time of determination of the presence of the next entry” of the means 2 and the entry of the entry of the presence of the entry from the time of determination of the presence of the predetermined entry of the means 3 are made. The configuration can be simplified by measuring the “elapsed time until the determination of the absence of a ball” using a common elapsed time measuring means. The following means 4 etc. are mentioned as an example as a structure which makes an elapsed time measurement means common.

Means 4. The entrance determination means indicates that the detection of the game ball has ended based on the switching of the signal level input from the entrance detection means (switching from the second level signal to the first level signal). It is configured to be able to determine that there is no entry,
The elapsed time measuring means determines that there is a predetermined entry when there is no entry during the measurement of the elapsed time from the predetermined entry presence determination time to the next entry presence determination time. Wait for the specified time (first specified time) to elapse from the time of determination, and finish measuring the elapsed time from the predetermined presence determination to the determination of no entry related to the determination that there is no entry The gaming machine according to means 3, characterized in that:

Means 5. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
A starting pitching means arranged in the gaming area;
Lottery means for performing a winning lottery due to a game ball entering the starting ball entry means;
Variable opening means having an opening / closing member capable of opening and closing, and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
An entrance detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the variable entrance means;
An opening / closing control means capable of executing a predetermined opening / closing operation a predetermined number of times when a winning result is obtained by the winning lottery;
An entrance counting means for counting the number of entrances of the game ball detected by the entrance detection means,
An abnormality determining unit that determines whether or not the number of balls counted by the ball counting unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined determination value, and determines whether there is an abnormality when the number is equal to or greater than the determination value. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the means 5, the predetermined number of abnormalities can be appropriately detected by monitoring (counting) the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means and making an abnormality determination based on the number of balls entered. Can do. As a result, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as radio wave goto with respect to the variable pitching means without any radio wave detection sensor.

  Further, according to this means, it is possible to perform an appropriate process according to the variable entry means as compared with the case where a plurality of entry means are monitored by one radio wave detection sensor. For example, if it is determined that there is an abnormality with respect to the variable pitching means, the processing related to other pitching means is stopped without greatly affecting the processing related to other pitching means, such as stopping only the processing related to the variable pitching means. It is also possible to take measures corresponding only to specific fraud aimed at the ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to the radio wave goto and efficiently suppress the radio wave goto.

  “Radio Goto” includes, for example, a high level separately from the fraud that increases the number of detections by dividing the level signal output based on detecting the game ball that actually passes through the ball detection means as described above. A method using a radio wave transmitter that freely controls on / off of a signal and a low level signal is also conceivable. According to this method, it is possible to erroneously detect that a game ball has entered without actually entering the game ball into the entrance means.

  The radio wave goto performed based on actually entering the game ball into the entrance means in the previous stage must insert an improper radio wave at the timing when the game ball actually passes through the entrance detection means. Difficult to run. On the other hand, the method using the transmitter at the latter stage is relatively easy to execute without actually entering the game ball into the entry means. The provision is more effective as a countermeasure against radio waves.

  In addition, as the “predetermined opening / closing operation”, for example, “after the switching of the opening / closing member from the closed state to the opened state, when the specified time has elapsed, the opening / closing operation is performed once until the closed state”, "Opening / closing that is performed once after a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing member is switched from a closed state to an open state or until a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the entrance detection means. Operation ".

  In the former configuration, a closed state may be adopted when a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the entrance detection means during a predetermined number (1 or 2 or more) of opening / closing operations. Further, the predetermined number of opening / closing operations may be set as one round, and the round may be executed a predetermined number of times (1 or 2 or more).

Means 6. The opening / closing member has a plurality of types (a plurality of patterns) of operation modes of the opening / closing member related to a single opening / closing operation,
6. A gaming machine according to claim 5, further comprising determination value storage means for storing the determination value corresponding to each operation mode of the opening / closing member.

  In recent years, the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means performed when a predetermined winning result is obtained by winning lottery has been diversified. For example, the number of executions of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member, the specified time required for the opening / closing operation, and the like change according to the winning result. In addition, the operation mode of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member may be switched (a plurality of operation modes are performed) during the occurrence of a series of special game states (for example, a 15-round jackpot state). For this reason, for example, in the configuration in which the determination value for abnormality determination is stored for each series of special gaming states (hit types) in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is executed a predetermined number of times, the number of data storage may be enormous. There is.

  In this regard, like the present means 6, by storing the determination value for abnormality determination corresponding to each operation mode of the opening / closing member, an increase in the number of stored data can be suppressed.

  In addition, an abnormality determination is made each time the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is completed without waiting for the end of each special game state such as a big win or small win, or each round or special prize state executed during the special game state. It is possible to detect fraud early and to suppress it.

  In addition, as a difference in the operation | movement aspect of an opening / closing member, for example, the regulation time required for one opening / closing operation | movement differs.

  Mean 7 The abnormality determination means includes the number of balls counted by the ball counting means within a predetermined time (such as during an interval) after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the opening / closing member is in the open state. Within a predetermined period of time (for example, within a period from the start of the first opening of the opening / closing member to the start of the second opening or within a period in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed a plurality of times). The gaming machine according to claim 5 or 6, wherein it is determined whether or not the number of balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined determination value, and if it is equal to or greater than the determination value, an abnormality is determined.

  When the number of balls detected by the ball-entry detecting means reaches a specified number, no matter how much the radio wave go is performed while the opening / closing member is open, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is properly terminated. In other words, as a case where the above illegal action is performed on the variable pitching means, there is a high possibility that it is performed while the opening / closing member is in the closed state. Further, during a predetermined time after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state (during an interval, etc.), the ball enters the variable ball entry means properly just before the opening / closing member is closed, but is still detected by the ball entry detection means. Since it is necessary to wait for detection of an unoccupied game ball (remaining ball), the detection process by the incoming ball detection means cannot be stopped. Therefore, the configuration of the means 7 is more effective.

  In view of this, “the abnormality determining unit determines in advance the number of balls counted by the ball counting unit within a predetermined time (such as during an interval) after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state. A determination is made whether there is an abnormality when it is greater than or equal to the determination value, and an effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the entrance detection means is valid is set. In the configuration, the abnormality determination means counts by the entrance counting means within a predetermined time after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state and after the effective period of the entrance detection means has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the number of entered balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined determination value, and if it is equal to or greater than the determination value, a determination is made that there is an abnormality. .

  Means 8. 8. The gaming machine according to any one of means 5 to 7, further comprising an informing means capable of informing that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on an abnormality determination by the abnormality determining means.

  According to the above means 8, by providing the notifying means, it is possible for a person related to the game hall or the like to know that some abnormality has occurred, such as an illegal act being performed on the variable pitching means. As a result, it leads to early detection of fraud. Examples of the notification means include light emission means such as a lamp, sound generation means such as a speaker, display means, and an external output means such as an external terminal board that outputs a signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

Means 9. An abnormality number storage means capable of storing the number of times determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination means;
9. The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the notification means notifies the fact when the number of times determined to be abnormal is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

  Even when an abnormality is detected, if the number of detections is small (for example, only once), there is a possibility that it is not an illegal act but an accidental entry. On the other hand, if a large number of such abnormalities are detected, there is a high possibility of fraud.

  In addition, when the radio wave detection sensor is used, the radio wave detected by the radio wave detection sensor includes many radio waves that are unrelated to the radio wave noise such as radio wave noises emitted from various electronic devices. If uniform processing is performed until such radio noise is detected, it will not be an appropriate countermeasure against radio goto, but will also bring unexpected disadvantages to players unrelated to radio goto There is also a fear.

  In this regard, according to the means 9, it is possible to determine that the radio wave has been performed by the above exemplified method, and it is possible to suppress the radio wave. Furthermore, accidental factors can be eliminated as much as possible, and the determination accuracy of the radio wave can be improved. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to a true fraud, and the fraud can be efficiently prevented. As a result, it is possible for the game hall to avoid unnecessary troubles with the player, such as not issuing an alarm unnecessarily, and to manage the hall smoothly.

  Means 10. 10. The means according to any one of means 1 to 9, wherein the entrance detection means is capable of detecting the passage of the game ball based on a change in magnetic flux accompanying the passage of the game ball (for example, a proximity switch). Game machines.

  Means 11. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a ball and ball gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine).

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 221 ... Winner opening switch, 223 ... Count switch, 224a, 224b ... First trigger corresponding unit switch, 225 ... Second trigger corresponding port switch, 104 ... Error indication lamp, 240 ... External relay terminal board, 261 ... Main controller, CT ... Abnormality monitoring timer.

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, in the game area where the launched game balls are guided, various entrance means for entering the game balls are provided. Each of these entrance means is provided with an entrance detection switch for detecting entrance of a game ball. Then, when the detection signal output from the entrance detection switch is input to the main control device, the main control device performs various controls relating to the game based on these detection signals ( see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2000-107396 A

However , there is a risk that an illegal act of intentionally causing the ball detection switch to malfunction is performed .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraud.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
Entry means arranged in the game area;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising control means for monitoring the signal output from the entrance detection means and performing predetermined control,
The incoming ball detection means continuously outputs a first level signal during non-detection of a game ball, and continuously outputs a second level signal during detection of a game ball,
The control means includes
A signal monitoring means for periodically monitoring the signal level input from the entrance detection means;
Based on the switching of the signal level input from the entrance detection means, at least entrance determination means capable of determining that a game ball has entered the entrance means,
An elapsed time measuring means capable of measuring an elapsed time from the time when there is an entry by the entry determining means to a predetermined opportunity;
Based on the elapsed time measured by said elapsed time measuring means, and a determinable abnormality judgment means whether a predetermined abnormal,
The elapsed time measuring means is configured to change the signal level from the first level to the second level, which is determined when there is a predetermined entry, and then from the first level, which is determined when the next entry is determined. It is configured to be able to measure the elapsed time until the signal level is switched to 2 levels,
The gist of the abnormality determining means is that it can be determined that there is an abnormality when the elapsed time is shorter than a predetermined time set in advance .

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is an excellent effect that fraud can be suppressed.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection structure of a winning opening switch and a main controller. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd opportunity corresponding | compatible opening passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows various table structures. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an opportunity corresponding unit control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of an off symbol counter. It is explanatory drawing which shows a table structure. (A) is a timing chart for demonstrating the output signal from a winning opening switch, (b) is a timing chart for demonstrating the input signal to CPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating abnormality determination processing etc. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the change of the magnetic field etc. in a proximity switch, (b) is a timing chart for demonstrating the output signal from a proximity switch. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the change of the magnetic field etc. of a proximity switch (entrance detection switch) at the time of fraud, (b) is for demonstrating the output signal from the proximity switch at that time It is a timing chart. It is a front view showing composition of an inner frame concerning the 2nd embodiment, a game board, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the 2nd mode determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the 1st mode determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st display control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination | determination information setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity corresponding | compatible unit control process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of the sub control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the command which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference in the structure of the various hit types which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference of the structure of various open | release types which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus control process which concerns on another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process which concerns on another embodiment.

As described above, there is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, in the game area where the launched game balls are guided, various entrance means for entering the game balls are provided. Each of these entrance means is provided with an entrance detection switch for detecting entrance of a game ball. And when the detection signal output from the entrance detection switch is input to the main control device, the main control device performs various controls relating to the game based on these detection signals.

For example, when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance means, the main control device transmits a payout command corresponding to the detection result to the payout control device. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to predetermined ball entry means are paid out to the player.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not a big hit state is to be generated, and when a win result is obtained, a big hit state advantageous to the player is generated. When the big hit state occurs, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls by putting the game ball into the big hitting means.

As a general entrance detection switch, a number of proximity switches that are non-contact type and excellent in durability are employed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

The proximity switch detects passage of the game ball by detecting a change in magnetic flux accompanying the passage of the game ball.

More specifically, the proximity switch has a passage hole through which a game ball passes, a detection coil disposed around the passage hole, and a high-frequency oscillation circuit connected to the detection coil. When the game ball passes through the passage hole, an induced current flows through the metal game ball due to electromagnetic induction. In this case, the oscillation amplitude, the oscillation frequency, and the like change in the high-frequency oscillation circuit due to changes in the inductance and loss of the detection coil. By detecting this with the detection circuit, the passage of the game ball can be detected in a non-contact manner. A signal detected by the detection circuit is output to the outside through an output circuit including a comparator.

Under the above configuration, in a normal state where the game ball does not pass through the passage hole, a low level signal is output from the output terminal of the proximity switch, while on the other hand, when the game ball passes through the passage hole, the high level is output. A signal is output. The main control device can detect that the game ball has passed by detecting the change in the signal level.

For example, when the game ball passes through the passage hole of the proximity switch, the oscillation amplitude, oscillation frequency, etc. of the high-frequency oscillation circuit change during the passage of the game ball (time TS1 to TS2) as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34B, the output level from the output terminal is switched from the low level (L) to the high level (H).

However, when such a proximity switch is used as a ball detection switch, the magnetic field around the detection coil changes due to the influence of external radio waves, and the game ball passes even though the game ball does not pass. May be falsely detected. For this reason, there has been a risk that a fraudulent act of intentionally causing the proximity switch to malfunction, that is, a so-called “radio wave” is performed using a device that transmits radio waves.

For example, for a proximity switch (entrance detection switch) that detects the entry of a game ball, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), the call is transmitted while the game ball is passing (time TS1 to TS2). By inserting radio waves having a short time (time TK1 to TK2), the output level of the proximity switch becomes a low level (L) during the time TK1 to TK2, as shown in FIG. In other words, the signal level is switched twice while the game ball is passing (time TS1 to TS2), and in fact, there is one game ball that has entered the ball entry means. It can be erroneously detected that there was a ball.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraud.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203, and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. .

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the lower center, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 protruding toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as launching device) 70 as launching means described later while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launch rail that guides the launch device 70 and the game ball immediately after being launched from the launch device 70. 61 is attached. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is adopted as the firing device 70.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a first opportunity corresponding unit (operating port) 33, a second opportunity corresponding port 34, a variable display device unit 35, etc. in through holes formed by router processing. The game board 30 is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, it is detected by various detection switches described later, and the upper plate 19 (or lower) A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  The first opportunity corresponding unit 33 includes an upper winning opening 33a and a lower winning opening 33b, and a pair of opening / closing members 33c corresponding to the lower winning opening 33b. As a result, the upper winning opening 33a is in an open state in which a game ball can always enter, whereas the lower winning opening 33b is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 33c according to the establishment of a predetermined condition. There is a switch between a closed state where the ball cannot enter and an open state where the game ball can enter. For example, the lower winning opening 33b is when the opening / closing member 33c is in the open state in the normal mode and a specified time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or when a specified number (for example, 1) of game balls have entered. Closed. This opening / closing process is performed only once in the normal mode. Instead of the above configuration, the lower winning opening 33b may be switched between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state.

  The variable display device unit 35 receives a prize for the normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays with the passage of the second opportunity corresponding port 34 as a trigger, and the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning port 33a or lower winning port 33b). A special display device 43 that performs variable display as a trigger and a decorative symbol display device 42 that performs variable display in accordance with the variable display by the special display device 43 are provided.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured so that “O” or “X” can be lit and displayed as a normal symbol, and each time the game ball passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed from “O” to “ Switching display (fluctuation display) is performed at high speed such as “×” → “◯” →. When the change display is stopped for a few seconds with the “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is activated for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when the game ball newly passes through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display performed at that time. It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The special display device 43 is provided on the right side of the normal symbol display device 41, and is composed of three-color light emitting diodes (three-color LEDs) having red, green, and blue emission colors. Then, each time the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, a color change display (variable display) is performed, and the lighting mode (lighting color) when the variable display stops determines whether or not it is a big hit. Is displayed.

  More specifically, when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, the special display device 43 displays the three-color LED at a high speed such as red → green → blue → red →. When a predetermined time elapses, it is determined and displayed in one of the colors. High-speed color change display means, for example, that red, green, and blue are displayed in order every 4 msec. In the case of winning the big hit lottery, at this time, it is determined and displayed in red or green (for example, stopped for several seconds), and a special gaming state occurs. In particular, red is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a high probability mode described later, and green is a display indicating that the game mode after the jackpot ends is a time reduction mode described later. The display content of the special display device 43 is also directly controlled by the main control device 261.

  Further, when a new game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 during the variable display of the special display device 43, the corresponding variable display is performed after the end of the variable display at that time. It has a configuration. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 46. Yes. In addition, when a new game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on a command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the special display device 43, Display is performed by the display control device 45. On the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower are displayed. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each symbol sequence, and then the upper symbol sequence → the lower symbol sequence → the middle symbol sequence. Stops are displayed in order. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won in the case of a big hit (occurrence of a special game state). Specifically, the passage of a specified time (for example, 29 seconds) or a specified number (for example, 10) of winnings is regarded as one round (special prize state), and the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Opened.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail constituting part 51 and an outer rail constituting part 52, and a rail 50 for guiding a game ball launched from the launching device 70 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, the parallel part of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 is excluded.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the front frame set 14, a ball passage 71 is provided below the window portion 101 so as to connect to a discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15 from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later. In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the firing rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the rear side of the front frame set 14 has dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 15 is formed. Thus, if the game ball launched from the launching device 70 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is transferred to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, a passage leading to the upper plate 19, and a ball passage. 71 and the passage leading to the lower plate 15. A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion on the entrance side of the ball passage 71.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board mounting unit 701 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 corresponds to various winning ports such as a general winning port 31 as a winning means and detects a game ball that has entered the various winning holes (entrance detecting means). Is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is provided with first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b corresponding to the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b, respectively. Further, a second opportunity corresponding port switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the second opportunity corresponding port 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225 via a cable connector. It has been. The first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 through a cable connector.

  On the other hand, the first opportunity corresponding switches 224a and 224b that detect the entry into the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b) are directly connected via the connector cable without passing through the relay board. It is connected to the control device 261.

As will be described in detail later, the detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225).
Here, the configuration of various incoming ball detection switches will be described. In the present embodiment, as a prize opening switch 221, a count switch 223, first trigger corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, and a second trigger corresponding opening switch 225, a penetration type proximity switch that is conventionally used is employed.

  The penetration type proximity switch has a passage hole through which a game ball passes. A detection coil connected to a high-frequency oscillation circuit is disposed around the passage hole. When the game ball passes through the passage hole, an induced current flows through the metal game ball due to electromagnetic induction. In this case, the oscillation amplitude, the oscillation frequency, and the like change in the high-frequency oscillation circuit due to changes in the inductance and loss of the detection coil. By detecting this with the detection circuit, the passage of the game ball can be detected in a non-contact manner. A signal detected by the detection circuit is output to the outside through an output circuit including a comparator.

  Next, an electrical configuration relating to the above-described entrance detection switch and the main control device 261 will be described with reference to an example of the relationship with the winning opening switch 221 shown in the schematic block diagram of FIG. However, in FIG. 8, for the sake of convenience, the first board surface relay board that relays both of them is omitted.

  The award opening switch 221 formed of a through-type proximity switch as described above includes an input terminal 221a, an output terminal 221b, and a ground terminal 221c.

  The input terminal 221a of the prize opening switch 221 is connected to the power supply terminal 227 of the main controller 261 via a predetermined electric path 226 constituted by a cable connector, a first board surface relay board, or the like. As a result, +12 V power generated by the power supply device 313, which will be described later, is supplied to the winning opening switch 221 as the operating power.

  The output terminal 221b of the prize opening switch 221 is connected to the inverting circuit 229 of the main controller 261 via a predetermined electric path 228 constituted by a cable connector, a first board surface relay board, or the like. The inverting circuit 229 of the main control device 261 is connected to a CPU 501 described later. As a result, the output signal from the winning opening switch 221 is logically inverted by the inverting circuit 229 of the main controller 261 and input to the CPU 501.

  The ground terminal 221c of the prize opening switch 221 is electrically connected (grounded) to the ground level of the main controller 261 via a predetermined electrical path 230 constituted by a cable connector, a first board surface relay board, or the like. Although not shown, the CPU 501 (earth terminal) is naturally connected to the ground level. Here, the ground level refers to the entire electrical path that is at the reference potential of 0 V in the main controller 261.

  With the above configuration, a high level signal of + 12V is output from the output terminal 221b during normal times when the game ball does not pass through the through hole of the winning hole switch 221. On the other hand, when the game ball is passing through the passage hole, a low level signal having a reference potential of 0 V is output. Therefore, a low level signal is normally input to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 via the inverting circuit 229, and a high level signal is input when the passage of a game ball is detected.

  The reason why the winning opening switch 221 outputs a high level signal during normal time and outputs a low level signal during game ball detection is to prevent erroneous detection by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261.

  In a configuration in which a low level signal is output during normal time and a high level signal is output when a game ball is detected as in the prior art, noise is applied to the electrical path 228 between the winning port switch 221 and the main control device 261. There is a possibility that the CPU 501 may mistakenly recognize that a game ball has passed though it has been input to the main control device 261 as a high level signal, and the game ball has not actually passed through the prize opening switch 221. there were. Causes of noise include static electricity generated by various electronic devices, vibrations caused by the player shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 10, and the like.

  Furthermore, for example, the connector of the cable connector that connects the prize opening switch 221 and the main control device 261 is intentionally inserted or removed, or the connection state of the connector is loosened in advance, and vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 to Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of generating a high level signal by causing the male and female pins to collide with each other, the above configuration also has an effect of suppressing this.

  Although not described in detail, the relationship between the main controller 261 and other ball detection switches (count switch 223, first trigger corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, second trigger corresponding port switch 225) is also a prize opening. The configuration is the same as that of the switch 221.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid that opens the large winning opening in the variable winning apparatus 32, and a pair of opening / closing members is provided in the first opportunity corresponding unit 33. A lower winning opening solenoid that opens and closes 33c is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided in the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numeral is given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (such as a big hit state or a high probability state), the front frame set 14 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later, A terminal for outputting information relating to the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information relating to various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and the payout from the payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information on the number of winning balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate mounting unit 701. Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate mounting unit 701), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported on the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It has been.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

  Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power Is input.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 70). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 261 (main board) of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by normal processing (see FIG. 11), and on the contrary, returning of each value written to the backup area 503a includes turning on the power (including turning on the power due to power failure cancellation). The same processing is performed in the main process (see FIG. 10). Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) of FIG. 16 is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, a special display device 43, a normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, for convenience, illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted, but the input / output port 505 includes a prize opening switch 221, a count switch 223, first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, a second opportunity corresponding opening switch 225, and the like. Various detection switches and various electrical components such as various substrates are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. In addition to a RAM 553 that is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input / output port 554, a bus line 555, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are also provided. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, various illumination units, and lamps 102 to 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the sub control device 262. Then, display according to the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 25), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process at the time of turning on the power (see FIG. 25). . As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when it is returned to the front, and it is turned off when the received command is determined by a command determination process (see FIG. 27) described later.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 70, and the launch device 70 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that it is not done, the launching device 70 is driven, and the game ball is launched at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527 and analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526 ( Specifically, internal command generation for VDP 526 is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 16).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 performs lottery (big hit lottery) using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot random number counter C1 as a lottery random number counter used for the jackpot lottery and the mode determination used for determining the transition to the high probability mode or the low probability mode described later when the jackpot is won. The counter C2, the variation selection counter C3 used for determining the variation display time of the special display device 43, the initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation display time of the special display device 43 The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determining the normal symbol and the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 41 are used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for a variation pattern and reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display device 43 is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern (effect mode) are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area and a second reserved ball storage area as a storage area composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each area of the first reserved ball storage area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the first opportunity corresponding unit 33. It is designed to be stored. In addition, in each area of the second reserved ball storage area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34. Yes.

  In detail, each jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 676, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 676) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. The configuration is back to Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upward winning port 33a or lower winning port 33b) is stored in the first reserved ball of the RAM 503. Stored in the area. There are two types of jackpot random numbers, a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode, etc.) and a high probability state (high probability mode). The number of random number values to be 2 is “337, 673”, the number of random number values that are jackpots in the high probability state is 10, and the value is “67, 131, 199, 269,337,401,463,523,601,661 ".

  Here, various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, the game mode (game state) is switched between a normal mode (normal state) and a plurality of specific modes that are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. More specifically, as the specific mode, two modes, a high probability mode and a time reduction mode, are set. Among these, the high probability mode is a game mode that continues until the next jackpot, and the time reduction mode is a mode that shifts to the next mode after the predetermined period.

  The normal mode refers to a normal state that is not a specific mode such as the high probability mode. Therefore, in the normal mode, the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state) is a normal low probability.

  In addition, the high probability mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed with “red” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability variation symbol), and the subsequent big hit A state in which the probability is higher than that in the low probability state. In the following description, the case where the decorative symbol display device 42 is a jackpot due to the probability variation symbol is referred to as “probability variation jackpot”, and the case where the jackpot is due to a normal symbol other than the probability variation symbol is referred to as “normal jackpot”.

  In the high probability mode, the jackpot probability is increased and a high probability state is obtained. In addition, in this embodiment, (1) a state in which the variable display time in the special display device 43 is shortened (time shortening state). (2) A state in which the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, and (3) a specified time (opening time) related to the opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (lower winning award 33b) as compared with the normal mode. In the state where it is lengthened, or the prescribed number (winning number) is increased as compared with the normal mode, (4) when the winning result indicating that the symbol “○” is stopped on the normal symbol display device 41 is obtained. (5) Probability that the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the current number of times the opening / closing process of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is executed more times than in the normal mode) The probability) is a state of being higher than the winning probability of the normal mode is given. More specifically, in the high probability mode, the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is in an open state, and when a specified time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a specified number (for example, 3) of game balls enter. Closed when there is a ball. This opening / closing process is repeated twice. As a result, the bottom winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is frequently opened, and the big win lottery is continuously made, and the ball is well held. In addition to this, as a high probability mode, in addition to increasing the jackpot probability (winning probability of the jackpot state), any combination of the above configurations (1) to (5) (for example, (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and (4), (1) and (5), (2) and (3 ), (2) and (4), (2) and (5), (3) and (4), (3) and (5), (4) and (5), (1) and (2) (3), (1) and (2) and (4), (1) and (2) and (5), (1) and (3) and (4), (1) and (3) and (5 ), (1) and (4) and (5), (2) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (5), (2) and (4) and (5), (3), (4) and (5), (1), (2), (3) and (4), (1), (2), (3) and (5), (1) and (2 ) And (4) (5) can be employed (1) and (3) and (4) (5), and (2) and (3) and (4) (5)). Note that, according to the states (2) to (5), the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time at the lower winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is higher than the ratio in the normal mode. That is, such a state corresponds to the high ball entering state in the present embodiment. Therefore, the high probability mode can be paraphrased as a high probability, a time reduction, and a high pitching mode. On the other hand, a state that is not in the states (2) to (5) as in the normal mode corresponds to a low entry state.

  In addition, the time reduction mode is a big hit when the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed in “green” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a normal symbol other than a predetermined probability variation symbol). Thereafter, the game mode is set while the variable display of the special display device 43 is performed 100 times, which means a state more advantageous to the player than the normal mode. In the time shortening mode, the jackpot probability is as low as that in the normal mode, and the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time at the lower winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is higher than the ratio in the normal mode. It is a high game mode. In the present embodiment, the states (1) to (5) given in the high probability mode are given in the same manner. That is, except for the difference in jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state), the same state (time shortening state and high pitching state) is obtained. Of course, as in the high probability mode, any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) can be adopted. Therefore, the time shortening mode can be restated as a low probability / time shortening / high pitching mode.

  For example, the mode determination counter C2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), the mode determination counter C2 returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the mode determination counter C2 determines whether or not to shift to the high probability mode after the big hit. Specifically, if the counter value is an odd number such as “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, the transition to the high probability mode is determined, and if the counter value is an even number such as “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”. In this case, the transition to the time reduction mode is determined. Although the term “transition” is used here, the high probability mode is continued if the counter value is odd when originally in the high probability mode, and the counter value is even when originally in the time reduction mode. If so, the time shortening mode is continued. The mode determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the mode determination counter C2 is stored in the mode determination counter buffer. The value of the mode determination counter C2 stored in the mode determination counter buffer is the first reserved ball in the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upward winning port 33a or lower winning port 33b). Stored in the storage area.

  Further, the variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. In this embodiment, after the reach is generated with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped, and the last stop after the occurrence of reach is also performed. “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol and “completely disengagement” where reach does not occur are selected by lottery. For example, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear outreach and C3 = 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. The reach lottery may be individually set according to the state of the lottery probability, the number of starting reserved balls at the start of change, and the like. The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is the first reserved ball in the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a or lower winning opening 33b). Stored in the storage area.

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 240) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. This is also shown in FIG. The first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type (reach pattern) of decorative symbols, such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final after the reach has occurred. A more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops is determined. Accordingly, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when “big hit” occurs, one of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected, and when “out-of-front reach” occurs, normal reach and super reach are selected. When either one is selected and “reach other than front / rear out” occurs, normal reach is selected. In addition, in the case of “completely off”, none of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the big hit random number counter C1, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 250) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right second opportunity corresponding port 34. Is done. Normally, there are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. On the other hand, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, that is, in the case where the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is in the high pitching state, there are 224, and the range is “5-228”. That is, the probability of stopping the symbol “◯” in the normal symbol display device 41 is higher than that in the normal mode. When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning (in this example, “◯”) is stopped and displayed. Then, the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is activated for a predetermined time. Further, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, the time until the lottery result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (variable display time of the normal symbol) is shortened. The ratio at which the unit 33 is in a high entrance state increases. As a result, the bottom winning opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is frequently opened, and lottery lottery is continuously performed.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 12, first, in step S301, various incoming ball detection switch reading processes are executed. As will be described in detail later, here, the state of various ball detection switches connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information is stored.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, 676, 9 respectively. , 238, 250) is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is executed, and in step S305, a second opportunity corresponding port passing process accompanying the passing of the game ball to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 is performed. Run. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the switch reading process in step S301 will be described in detail. In this switch reading process, each ball detection switch (winning port switch 221, count switch 223, first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b, second opportunity corresponding port switch 225) is individually monitored and individually received. Similar processing is performed. Therefore, the switch reading process related to the winning opening switch 221 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 13 as an example, but the same process as the process shown in FIG.

  First, in step S401, the signal level of the input signal from the winning opening switch 221 is checked. The function of this processing constitutes the signal monitoring means in this embodiment.

  For example, when the game ball is not passing through the passage hole of the winning opening switch 221, a high level signal (H) of + 12V is output from the winning opening switch 221 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32A), and main control is performed. On the device 261 side, a low level signal (L) having a reference potential of 0 V is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32B). FIG. 32A is a timing chart for explaining an output signal from the winning opening switch 221, and FIG. 32B is a timing chart for explaining an input signal to the CPU 501.

  On the other hand, while a game ball enters the general winning port 31 and the game ball is passing through the passage hole of the winning port switch 221, a low level signal (L) is output from the winning port switch 221 [ In the main controller 261 side, the high level signal (H) is input to the CPU 501 via the inverting circuit 229 (see timings t2 and t3 in FIG. 32B).

  In the subsequent step S402, the signal level checked in step S401 is stored in the signal level buffer for the winning opening switch 221 provided in the work area of the RAM 503.

  In addition, the signal level buffer is provided corresponding to each ball detection switch (award opening switch 221, count switch 223, first trigger corresponding unit switches 224 a and 224 b, second trigger corresponding opening switch 225), The signal level for each entrance detection switch is stored. The signal level buffer corresponds to the level storage means in this embodiment.

  The signal level buffer is configured by a ring buffer. What is a ring buffer conceptually? Is the start address and end address in the buffer area ring-shaped? Thus, the buffer is controlled so that writing is performed in order from the top address using the two address pointers of the write pointer and the read pointer, and when the final address is reached, the write back to the top address can be performed again. After data is written at a predetermined address position indicated by the write pointer, the value of the write pointer is updated to a value indicating the next address. Similarly, after data is read from a predetermined address position indicated by the read pointer, the value of the read pointer is updated to a value indicating the next address.

  In addition, the latest 200 msec data, that is, 100 cycles of data is stored in the ring buffer that constitutes each signal level buffer of this embodiment, and the oldest data beyond this is erased in order. Yes. Further, the position of the read pointer indicates a predetermined address position where the latest data is stored. As described later, the data for the past plural times is read based on the position of the read pointer. .

  Returning to the description of step S402, each time the signal level is checked at a cycle of 2 msec, the logical value corresponding to the signal level is sequentially written in the predetermined address position indicated by the write pointer in the signal level buffer for the winning prize switch 221. To go. Here, when the signal level of the input signal to the CPU 501 is “H (high)”, a logical value “1” is stored as level information indicating this, and the signal level is “L (low)”. Stores a logical value “0” as level information indicating this.

  In step S403, when the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set by looking at the setting status of an abnormality monitoring timer CT described later (for example, a value of a setting flag that can determine whether or not the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set), The abnormality monitoring timer CT is subtracted. As will be described later, 1000 msec is initially set in the abnormality monitoring timer CT, and each time this process is performed, the value is subtracted by 2 msec. On the other hand, if the abnormality monitoring timer CT is not set, the process proceeds to the next process as it is. The abnormality monitoring timer CT constitutes elapsed time measuring means in the present embodiment.

  In step S404, a calculation process, which is a pre-process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 31, is performed.

  More specifically, logical inversion processing is performed on the earliest data (oldest data) of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer, and the earliest data that has been logically inverted and the remaining 2 data. Calculate the logical product of all the batch data. Then, this value is temporarily stored in the work area of the RAM 503. The function of this processing constitutes the logic inversion means and the logical product calculation means in this embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the logical values of the signal levels stored at timings t1, t2, and t3 are “0”, “1”, and “1”, the logical inversion of the earliest data When processing is performed, the earliest data is “1”. Therefore, the logical product of this data and the other two data is “1”.

  In subsequent step S405, it is determined whether or not the logical product value calculated in step S404 is "1". Here, when the logical product value is “1”, it means that the signal level has been switched from “L” to “H”. In step S406, “1” is set to the value of the ball entry determination flag for the prize opening switch 221 (general winning opening 31), and the process proceeds to step S408. In addition, the entrance discrimination flag is a discriminator for discriminating whether or not there is an entrance and is provided corresponding to each entrance detection switch. In the start winning process in step S304 and the second opportunity corresponding port passing process in step S305, the presence / absence of a ball is determined based on this.

  On the other hand, if the logical product value is “0” in step S405, the signal level remains “L” or “H” for the past 4 msec, or the signal level is “H”. This means that the game has been switched from “L” to “L” and the like, so that it is determined that there is no entry to the general winning opening 31 and “0” is set to the value of the entering determination flag for the winning opening switch 221 in step S407. Then, the process proceeds to step S413. The function of the series of processes (entrance determination process) in steps S404 to S407 described above constitutes the entrance determination unit in the present embodiment.

  In step S408, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is 964 msec or more. As will be described later, the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set to 1000 msec when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31. That is, in step S408, the time has elapsed from the first time point t5 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31 to the second time point t7 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning port 31 next. It is determined whether or not the time TL3 is 36 msec or less (see FIG. 33).

  As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the time TL1 required for a game ball (a pachinko ball having a diameter of 11.0 mm) to freely fall and pass through a passing hole such as the prize opening switch 221 is 8 msec to 30 msec at the latest. Degree. Even if two game balls enter the general winning opening 31 or the like so that two game balls are connected, the detection start time t7 of the game ball entered secondly from the end t6 of the detection of the game ball entered first t7 It takes a time TL2 of 28 msec or longer. Accordingly, the time TL3 elapsed from the first time point t5 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning port 31 to the second time point t7 when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning port 31 is 36 msec. In the following cases, there is a high possibility that the “radio wave” as described in the “problem to be solved by the invention” has been performed.

  However, even when an abnormality is detected such that the game ball entry interval (time TL3) is 36 msec or less, if the number of times of detection is small (for example, only once), it is not an illegal act. There may be a possibility of an accident due to noise or the like. On the other hand, if a large number of such abnormalities are detected, there is a high possibility of fraud. The “36 msec” corresponds to the specified time (first specified time) in the present embodiment. Note that the numerical value of 36 msec is arbitrarily set, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a value capable of discriminating an abnormality caused by the “radio wave”.

  Therefore, if it is determined in step S408 that the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is 964 msec or more, 1 is added to the value of the abnormality count counter provided in the work area of the RAM 503 in step S409, In step S410, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality count counter is 50 or more. The abnormality count counter is an abnormality number storage unit that adds and stores the number of times determined to be abnormal. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is less than 964 msec, the process proceeds to step S412 as it is. The function of the determination process in step S408 constitutes an abnormality determination unit in the present embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S410 that the value of the abnormality count counter is 50 or more, the first notification setting process is performed in step S411, and then the process proceeds to step S412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the abnormal count counter is less than 50, the process proceeds to step S412.

  In the first notification setting process in step S411, a setting process (notification process) for notifying that there is an abnormality is performed. For example, in the present embodiment, settings for outputting a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 to the sub-control device 262, settings for outputting an error signal to the hall computer of the game hall, and the like are performed. Based on this, in the external output process of the normal process described later, the command is output to the sub-control device 262, and the blinking control of the error display lamp 104 is performed by the sub-control device 262. The error display lamp 104, the external relay terminal plate 240 that outputs a ball entry error signal, and the like constitute notification means in the present embodiment.

  In step S412, the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set due to the current determination that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31. In this embodiment, 1000 msec which is the second specified time is set here. The numerical value of 1000 msec is arbitrarily set, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a value that can discriminate an abnormality caused by an “illegal large sphere” described later.

  Thereafter, in step S413, a detection end time determination process is performed to specify the end of detection of the game ball by the winning prize switch 221.

  Specifically, first of all, the latest data (newest data) of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer is logically inverted, and the latest logically inverted data and the remaining 2 Calculate the logical product of all the batch data. Then, this value is temporarily stored in the work area of the RAM 503.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the logical values of the signal levels stored at timings t2, t3, and t4 are “1”, “1”, and “0”, the logical inversion process of the latest data is performed. As a result, the latest data is “1”. Therefore, the logical product of this data and the other two data is “1”.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculated logical product value is “1”. Here, when the logical product value is “1”, it means that the signal level has been switched from “H” to “L”. “1” is set to the value of the end determination flag for (general winning opening 31). The end discrimination flag is a discriminator for discriminating the end of the entrance detection, and is provided corresponding to each entrance detection switch. And in the determination process of step S415 mentioned later, the time of completion | finish of a ball entry detection is discriminate | determined based on this. On the other hand, when the logical product value is “0”, the signal level remains “L” or “H” for the past 4 msec, or the signal level does not switch from “L” to “H”. “0” is set to the value of the end determination flag for the prize opening switch 221.

  In a succeeding step S414, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is less than 964 msec. That is, it is determined whether or not 36 msec has elapsed since it was determined that there was a ball entering the general winning opening 31.

  If it is determined that the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is less than 964 msec, it is determined in step S415 whether the value of the end determination flag is “1”. On the other hand, when the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is 964 msec or more, the process proceeds to step S417 as it is.

  When it is determined in step S415 that the value of the end determination flag is “1”, that is, when it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the winning hole switch 221 is ended, the value of the end determination flag is determined in step S416. Is set to “0”, and the setting of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is cancelled. Here, to cancel the setting of the abnormality monitoring timer CT, for example, the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is reset to an initial value (1000 msec in the present embodiment), or whether or not the abnormality monitoring timer CT is set is determined. This includes changing the value of a possible setting flag from “1” indicating presence of setting to “0” indicating no setting.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S415 that the value of the end determination flag is “0”, the process proceeds to step S417 as it is.

  In step S417, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not 1 second (1000 msec) has elapsed since it was determined that there was a ball entering the general winning award 31 under the condition where the abnormality monitoring timer CT was set. Here, if it is determined that one second has not elapsed, the present process is terminated as it is. If the method of resetting the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT to the initial value (for example, 0 msec) is adopted when canceling the setting of the abnormality monitoring timer CT in step S416, in step S417, for example, abnormality monitoring is performed. A configuration may be employed in which it is determined whether or not the value of the timer CT is “2” or less.

  “Radio Goto” includes, for example, legitimate acts such as the above-described fraud that separates the level signal that is output based on the detection of the game ball that actually passes through the prize opening switch 221 and the like and increases the number of detections. Using a game ball (11.0 mm in diameter) and a game ball (hereinafter referred to as “illegal large sphere”, eg, 11.8 mm in diameter) having a diameter larger than that of the winning hole switch 221 (for example, 11.4 mm in diameter). Is also possible. In such a case, an illegal large ball is first placed in the ball path in advance by, for example, winning a prize in the general winning opening 31. If it does so, the said illegal large ball will be in the state caught by the said passage hole, without passing the passage hole of the winning opening switch 221. FIG. Thereby, the winning opening switch 221 is always in an ON state (a state in which a low level signal is output) in which an illegal large ball is detected. In this state, by appropriately transmitting an improper radio wave that turns off the winning opening switch 221 (a state in which a high level signal is output), the on / off state is switched, and the game ball is not passing through even though the game ball is not passing. It can be erroneously detected that the ball has passed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the time TL1 required for the game ball to pass through the passing hole such as the prize opening switch 221 is about 8 msec to about 30 msec at the latest. In other words, if the high level signal continues to be output for one second or longer from the time when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31, it is possible that an illegal act by the illegal large ball is being performed. High nature.

  Therefore, when an affirmative determination is made in step S417, that is, when one second has elapsed from the time when it is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 31, and the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT becomes “0”. In step S418, the second notification setting process is performed, and this process is terminated. The function of the determination process in step S417 constitutes an abnormality determination unit in the present embodiment.

  In the second notification setting process in step S418, a setting process for notifying that there is an abnormality is performed as in the first notification setting process (step S411).

  Next, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a or lower winning opening 33b) is determined by the value of the above described ball determination flag corresponding to the first opportunity corresponding unit switches 224a and 224b. Determine based on. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, in the subsequent step S502, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). The process proceeds to step S503 on condition that there is a winning in the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 and the number N of starting reserved balls is smaller than 4, and the number N of starting reserved balls is incremented.

  In subsequent step S504, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 are used as the first free storage area in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Store in the area. Thereafter, the start winning process is temporarily terminated.

  Next, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34 based on the value of the above-mentioned entrance determination flag corresponding to the second opportunity corresponding port switch 225. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second opportunity corresponding port 34, in the subsequent step S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of retained balls of the normal symbol display device 41 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine. The process proceeds to step S603 on the condition that there is a passage to the second opportunity corresponding port 34 and the number of reserved balls N <4, and the number of reserved balls N is incremented by one. In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the second opportunity corresponding port passing process is temporarily ended.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S701, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S103, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S113 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S105 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S113. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S106, and in the subsequent step S107, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process also proceeds to step S113 in this case.

  In the process of step S113, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like that are the sub-side control devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S114, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S114 or the like). That is, in step S114, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S115, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S108, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S109, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared. In step S110, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S111, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S112, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed. Here are some more specific examples.

  For example, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been awarded to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 with reference to the various winning determination flags, and if there is a winning prize ball corresponding to the number corresponding to the winning prize. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Then, after the transmission of the command, the value of the corresponding entry discrimination flag is returned to “0”.

  Further, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

  Further, in the external output process, information for grasping the game state is output to the hall computer of the game hall in consideration of various discrimination information such as a jackpot flag, which will be described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

  For example, when a ball entry error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and there is no ball entry error. , An off signal is output.

  Further, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the decorative symbol variation, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are commands that are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect that matches the display performed on the special display device 43. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to display (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is set as the variation pattern command. In the high probability mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, “FD16” are set, and in the time reduction mode, “FE10”, “FE11”. , “FE12”, “FE13”, “FE14”, “FE15”, “FE16” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores a relationship between these variation pattern commands and decoration symbol variation types in a table (see FIG. 31). Then, the sub control device 262 executes the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, “FF11” is set in the normal mode, “FD11” is set in the high probability mode, and “FE11” is set in the time reduction mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is set to “20 seconds” in the normal mode, “8 seconds” in the high probability mode, and “10 seconds” in the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types (super reach SR1, SR2, SR3) of 30 second, 40 second, and 50 second patterns are prepared for the super reach in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of the super reach SR1, “FF12” in the normal mode, “FD12” in the high probability mode, and “FE12” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands. In the case of the super reach SR2, “FF13” in the normal mode, “FD13” in the high probability mode, and “FE13” in the time reduction mode are set. In the case of the super reach SR3, “FF14” in the normal mode, “FD14” in the high probability mode, and “FE14” in the time reduction mode are set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. In the premium reach of this embodiment, two types (premium reach PR1, PR2) of 60-second and 70-second patterns are prepared in the normal mode. Note that the variable display time in the high probability mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode, as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the premium reach PR1, “FF15” in the normal mode, “FD15” in the high probability mode, and “FE15” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern command. In the premium reach PR2, “FF16” in the normal mode, “FD16” in the high probability mode, and “FE16” in the time reduction mode are set.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to “complete out” that does not reach any reach state is set to “FF10” in the normal mode, “FD10” in the high probability mode, and “FE10” in the time reduction mode. The In the present embodiment, the variable display time that is completely off is set to 10 seconds in the normal mode. Of course, the variable display time in the high probability mode and the time shortening mode is shortened compared to the normal mode as in the normal reach.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation symbols, a normal symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a complete out symbol design combination. Five classifications are designated, which are the combinations. These divisions are indicated by “A1”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described.

  The combination of probability variation symbols is a combination of symbols composed of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 and “A1” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of probability variation symbols. Then, when “A1” indicating the probability variation symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 in the form of a slot. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of normal symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8, and “A2” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of normal symbols. Then, when “A2” indicating the normal symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “A3” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “A4” is set in the command. The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “A5” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols. As will be described in detail later, when “A3” to “A5” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. In the present embodiment, three commands “A3” to “A5” are prepared for the symbol command for detachment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration having only one symbol command for detachment may be used.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 11, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the special display device 43, and the jackpot determination and the decorative pattern variation pattern (effect pattern) in the decorative design display device 42 are performed. Settings are made. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when the big win state (special game state) is reached, the opening / closing process of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step S208, an opportunity handling unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is set as to what control is performed in the first opportunity handling unit 33.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly change The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Now, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember. Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 17, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made. The jackpot includes a jackpot state (special game state) and a predetermined time after the jackpot state ends.

  In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not color change display (variation display) is being performed by the special display device 43 by looking at the setting status of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not a big hit and is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S803, where it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is greater than zero. At this time, if it is a big hit or if the number N of starting reserved balls is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Further, if neither the big hit or the variable display is being displayed and if the number of starting reserved balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, 1 is subtracted from the number N of starting reserved balls. In step S805, processing for shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas on hold in the first holding ball storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S806, a variable display setting process is executed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time, and the numerical value 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the low probability state such as the normal mode as described above. Among them, “337, 673” is a winning value, and in the high probability mode, “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661” is a winning value. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S901: NO), that is, when it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot. In the present embodiment, the system is configured to shift to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode with a probability of 1/2 in the case of a big hit. Specifically, whether or not to shift to the high probability mode is determined based on the value of the mode determination counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. If the value of the stored mode determination counter C2 is an odd number “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” among the numerical values 0 to 9, the transition to the high probability mode is determined (probability large hit), and the even number “ If it is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 ", the transition to the time reduction mode is determined (usually a big hit).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot (step S902: YES), the jackpot variation pattern is determined in step S904, and the probability variation symbol (“A1” in the present embodiment) is set to the symbol command in step S905. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S902 that it is not a probable big hit (step S902: NO), that is, if it is a normal big hit, a big hit variation pattern is determined in step S907, and a normal symbol (this embodiment) is determined in step S908. Then, “A2”) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  In steps S904 and S907, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern command. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and the symbol variation mode of the decorative symbol is determined based on the values of the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2. . The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like for each game mode. . Note that the mode determination in the present embodiment is performed by a combination of an on / off state of a high probability state flag, a time shortening state flag, and a high entry state flag, which will be described later. For example, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitched state flag are all on (flag value “1”), it is determined that the mode is a high probability mode.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the big hit time during the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a normal mode big hit table as shown in FIG. That is, when CS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of CS2. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 0 to 69, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 70 to 149, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 150 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 197, 198 and CS2 = 0-120, “FF15” (premium reach PR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 197, 198 and CS2 = 121-240, “FF16” (premium reach PR2) is set in the variation pattern command.

  The symbol commands in step S905 and step S908 indicate the jackpot symbol in a predetermined section, and the sub controller 262 determines the stop symbol as will be described later. Specifically, when “A1” indicating the combination of probability variation symbols is set in the symbol command (step S905), the symbol combination of any one of the first, third, fifth, seventh, and ninth slots is sub-selected. The control device 262 determines the stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” indicating the combination of normal symbols is set in the symbol command (step S908), any combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is changed to the sub-control device 262. Is determined as a stop symbol. After the symbol command is set in step S905 and step S908, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S909, which is shifted when a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a reach is reached. This determination is made based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation selection counter C3 causes the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach to stop by shifting by one by one before and after the reach symbol, and the final stop after the occurrence of reach. “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol and “completely disengagement” where reach does not occur are selected by lottery. For example, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear outreach and C3 = 2 to 21 correspond to reach other than front / rear disengagement, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete disengagement. Here, when it is determined that it is reach (step S909: YES), the process proceeds to step S910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not reach (step S909: NO), that is, if it is “completely out”, a dislocation variation pattern is determined in step S915, and a complete out symbol is set as a symbol command in step S916. Then, the process proceeds to step S917.

  In step S910, it is determined whether or not the front / rear reach is reached. If it is determined that the front / rear reach is out of step (step S910: YES), a deviation variation pattern is determined in step S911, the front / rear pattern is set as a symbol command in step S912, and the process proceeds to step S917. . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not front / rear detachment (step S910: NO), that is, when it is reach other than front / rear detachment, a detachment variation pattern is determined in step S913, and symbols other than front / rear detachment are determined in step S914. The command is set, and the process proceeds to step S917.

  When the outlier variation pattern is determined in steps S911, S913, and S915, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. And so on.

  Here, the correspondence between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation type will be described. For example, at the time of front / rear detachment during the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a table for front / rear detachment during the normal mode as shown in FIG. That is, when CS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of CS2. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 0 to 90, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 91 to 170, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 171 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. At the time of reach other than forward / backward deviation (C3 = 2 to 21), the reach is normal regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and “FF11” is set in the variation pattern command. Further, at the time of complete deviation (C3 = 22 to 238), “FF10” is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  Further, the symbol command in step S912, step S914, and step S916 indicates a predetermined division of the combination of symbols that are out of the same manner as in step S905 and the like. Specifically, when “A3” indicating a combination of front and rear symbols is set as a symbol command (step S912), the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command stores it in the front and rear error symbol buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the front / rear out of reach is determined as the stop symbol. When “A4” indicating a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment is set in the symbol command (step S914), a combination of symbols corresponding to reach other than front / rear detachment stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear detachment of RAM 553 is selected. The sub-control device 262 determines the stop symbol. When “A5” indicating the combination of completely out of symbols is set in the symbol command (step S916), the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete out of the symbol stored in the complete out of symbol buffer of the RAM 553 is sub-control unit 262. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  In step S917, start setting processing is performed to indicate that a condition for performing color change display (variation display) is satisfied in the special display device 43. In this start setting process, a display timer setting process is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. For example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), it is set to 10000 msec. As will be described later, the display timer is decremented by 4 msec every time the normal process is performed once. In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display device 43 in the present embodiment. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting color change display (variation display) is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output processing of normal processing, special display is performed. Color change display is started in the device 43. The special display device 43 is a three-color LED as described above, and changes color to green if the lit color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Then, after step S917 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17, if step S802 is YES, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S807 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when a display timer of 10000 msec is set, the value of the display timer is 9996 msec in the display timer subtraction process in the next normal process for the time when the display timer is set.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S808, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S808. If an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the display timer is canceled [turned off (cleared)] in step S809, and stop display setting for performing a stop display on the special display device 43 is performed in step S810. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the next external output process in the normal process. In other words, if it is a promiscuous jackpot with a transition to the high probability mode, the red is stopped (for example, lighted only for a few seconds), and if it is a regular jackpot with a transition to the time reduction mode, the green is stopped and displayed. If it is off, blue is stopped and displayed. Again, the main display is such a stop display by the special display device 43, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary.

  In step S811, discrimination information setting processing is performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, it is determined in step S1001 whether or not the stop display corresponds to a jackpot. Here, when it corresponds to jackpot, it transfers to step S1002 and performs jackpot setting. Specifically, processing for setting a jackpot flag, a variable flag, a variable timer, and a round number counter is performed. And after completion | finish of step S1002, a discrimination | determination information setting process is complete | finished.

  The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is a special gaming state, and here, “1” indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value. The value of the jackpot flag is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  The variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in an open state.

  The variable timer is means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening.

  The round number counter is discriminating information for discriminating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of special prize occurrences, that is, the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32) as will be described later. “15” indicating 15 rounds is set as a value.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the jackpot does not correspond, that is, it is determined that the game is out of place, the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed). As will be described later, “100” is set as the counter value after the end of the normal jackpot.

  Here, when the variation counter is canceled (in the off state), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (in the ON state), it is regarded that the time reduction state is being set, and in step S1004, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1005. To do.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the 100th variation display after the end of the normal jackpot (after the provision of the time reduction state). Here, if the remaining value of the variation counter is 0 count, a process of resetting a high pitching state flag described later in step S1006 is performed (set to “0”), and a time shortening state flag described later is set in step S1007. A process of resetting (setting “0”) is performed, a process of canceling (turning off) the variation counter is performed in step S1008, and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the value of the variation counter is not 0 count, the present process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 17, after the discrimination information setting process in step S <b> 811 is finished, the first display control process is finished. If the determination in step S808 is negative, in step S812, the color change display setting for continuously performing the color change display (fluctuation display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is performed, and this process is terminated. To do. Based on the setting contents of the color change display setting, a control signal for performing color change display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, it is set to change the color to green if the current lighting color is red, blue if it is green, and red if it is blue. Thereby, the color change display (variable display) of the LED of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms. In the present embodiment, the determination information setting process (step S811) is performed after the stop display setting process (step S810). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display setting process (step S806). It is good also as a structure performed after.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the variable winning device 32 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and when the variable flag is set in the determination processing of step S1201 ( When the variable flag is released (in the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state.

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal is output to the variable winning device 32 to close the big winning opening, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the variable flag is on, the variable winning device 32 is considered to be in the open state, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S1202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  In step S1203, the value of the variable timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1203. If a positive determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32 in step S1205 has reached a specified number. If a positive determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S1204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 has not reached the prescribed number, this processing is terminated as it is. Therefore, the variable winning device 32 maintains the open state until the specified opening time elapses or until the specified number of game balls wins, and becomes the closed state when the condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been released, that is, the number of executed rounds has reached a specified number (the value of the round number counter is 0), taking into account the value of the round number counter. . Here, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number, in step S1206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter, and this process is terminated as it is. That is, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executed rounds reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that the number of rounds has reached the specified number, an end setting process is performed in step S1207, and the process ends.

  In the end setting process of step S1207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (cancellation process), the jackpot flag reset process, the round number counter reset process, the high probability state flag setting process, and the time reduction state flag setting process Then, a process for setting a high pitching state flag, a process for setting a variation counter, and the like are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer.

  In the jackpot flag reset process, “0” indicating the end of the jackpot state is set as the flag value.

  The round number counter is canceled (off) by the reset processing of the round number counter.

  The high probability state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high probability state. In the high probability state flag setting process, the high probability state flag is stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. The flag value is switched and set based on the value of the current mode determination counter C2. As a result, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot), “1” indicating the occurrence of a high probability state is set as the flag value, and the time reduction mode is set (normal jackpot) “0” indicating the occurrence of a low probability state is set as the flag value.

  The time reduction state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a time reduction state. In the time reduction state flag setting process, “1” indicating that a time reduction state is generated is set. Set as a flag value.

  The high entry state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high entry state, and indicates that the high entry state is generated in the high entry state flag setting process. “1” is set as the flag value.

  The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the variation counter setting process, the high probability state flag setting process and Similarly, the change count counter is switched based on the value of the mode determination counter C2. Thus, when the high probability mode is set after the jackpot is finished (probability jackpot), the variation counter is canceled (off). On the other hand, when the time reduction mode is set (usually a big hit), “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter.

  Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 22, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not switching display (variation display) by the normal symbol display device 41 is in progress by looking at the setting state of the display timer. Specifically, when the display timer is set (when it is in the on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the display timer is released (when it is in the off state), the variable display is in a stopped state. It is considered that the stop display is in progress. If it is not in the variable display, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the number of reserved balls N is greater than zero. At this time, if the number of reserved balls N is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variable display is not being performed and the number of held balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls N. In step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the display timer setting process of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Note that the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 in the present embodiment is set in advance in each of the high and low entrance states as described above. Based on such setting of the display timer, when a control signal for starting switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing, the normal symbol is output. Switching display is started on the display device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If step S2101 is YES, that is, if variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2107. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the display timer is released [turned off (cleared)] in step S2108, and stop display setting for performing stop display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process in the normal process. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not it is won is determined based on the relationship between the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 and the mode at that time, and as described above, the numerical value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the low entry state such as the normal mode. Of the 0 to 250, “5-153” is the winning value, and “5 to 228” is the winning value in a high pitched state such as the high probability mode.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110 to perform discrimination information setting processing, and this processing is terminated. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing an opening / closing process of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is performed. Specifically, a setting process of a variable flag, a variable timer, and an opening number counter is performed.

  The variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is open.

  The variable timer is means for measuring the opening time of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening start.

  The opening number counter is determination information for determining the number of execution times of the opening / closing process of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity handling unit control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the variable flag of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is on. Here, when it is determined that the variable flag is not ON (OFF), this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, the variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the opening / closing member 33c (the lower winning opening 33b) of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is in the open state, and the determination process in step S2201 described above. In this case, when the variable flag is set (in the on state), it is regarded as being in the open state, and when the variable flag is released (in the case of the off state), it is regarded as being in the closed state. .

  Based on the ON / OFF state of the variable flag, various control signals are output to the first opportunity handling unit 33 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, and the lower prize opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member 33c is output to the first opportunity corresponding unit 33, and the lower prize opening 33b of the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 is closed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the variable flag is on, it is considered that the lower winning opening 33b of the first opportunity handling unit 33 is open, and variable timer subtraction processing is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the variable timer is decremented by 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, whether or not the number of game balls won in the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a and lower winning opening 33b) has reached a prescribed number in step S2205. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step S2204. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the number of winnings to the first opportunity handling unit 33 has not reached the specified number, this processing is terminated. Therefore, the first opportunity corresponding unit 33 maintains the open state of the lower winning opening 33b until a specified opening time elapses or until a specified number of game balls wins, and enters a closed state when the above condition is satisfied.

  Proceeding to step S2204, it is determined whether the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing member 33c of the first opportunity handling unit 33 has reached a specified number by taking into account the value of the number of times of opening counter (the value of the opening number counter is 0). . If the number of times of opening has not reached the specified number of times, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of times of opening counter in step S2206, and this process is terminated. That is, the opening / closing process is repeatedly performed until a predetermined number of times set in advance is reached.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2204 that the number of times of opening has reached the specified number of times, an end setting process is performed in step S2207, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process in step S2207, the variable flag and variable timer reset process (release process), the release number counter reset process, and the like are performed.

  More specifically, the variable flag and the variable timer are released (turned off) by the reset process of the variable flag and the variable timer. Further, the release number counter is released (turned off) by the reset process of the release number counter.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 24, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the write pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the next received command is stored in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined based on the detection signal from the lower plate full switch (not shown), and when the lower plate is full, the setting of the lower plate full state is executed. When it is no longer, execute the setting of the lower pan full tank release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the absence of the tank ball is discriminated based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch (not shown), and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Executes the setting of the no-release state.

  After that, in step S3207, if there is a state to be notified, for example, when various error states such as a bottom pan full error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error have occurred, the main control device uses this as an error signal. To H.261.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and the dispensing device 358 is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, processing of the sub control device 262 will be described. The sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the display mode is transferred to the display control device 45 in the decorative symbol display device 42. Display.

  Here, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This normal process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, in step S3901, external output processing for transmitting a control signal based on the setting content updated in the previous processing to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  In step S3902, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 and the upper, middle, and lower outlier counters CL, CM, and the like used for setting the outlier symbols in the upper row, middle row, and lower row, CR is used. The off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 determines the symbol when the variation of the decorative symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot is hit (the jackpot symbol). In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the decorative symbol. There are 5 patterns and 5 normal symbols. Accordingly, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the big hit decoration symbol counter C5. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter C5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, and reaches 0 to the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “A1” indicating a combination of probability variation symbols, for example, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), the counter value is If it is 0, it is “1”. ) If it is 4, the combination of probability variation symbols is determined in such a manner as “9” (the flat eye). When the symbol command is “A2” indicating a combination of normal symbols, for example, if the counter value is 0, “0” (based on a table (not shown) that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) ( 1) “2” (for the doublet), 2 for “4” (for the doublet), 3 for “6” (for the doublet), 4 for “8” ”(The doublet) and the normal symbol combination is determined. The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is periodically updated in the counter update process in step S3902, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. It may be.

  The upper, middle and lower off symbol counters CL, CM, CR determine the stop symbol (combination of the off symbol) of the upper row ornament symbol, middle row ornament symbol, and lower row ornament symbol when the big hit lottery is missed. Since each of 10 decorative symbols is displayed in each column, 10 (0 to 9) counter values are prepared for each column. The stop symbol of the upper symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CL, the stop symbol of the middle symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol of the lower symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CR.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and It is stored in one of the completely off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each off symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 30, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the out symbol counter CL of the upper symbol row, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the out symbol counter CM in the middle symbol row. . It should be noted that each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR of the upper symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the lower symbol row is configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the out symbol counter CR in the lower symbol row has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the out symbol counter CL in the upper symbol row has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If the upper symbol sequence is updated (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the out symbol symbol CL of the upper symbol sequence. If the middle symbol row update time (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the middle symbol row outlier symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if the lower symbol sequence is updated (NO in steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the out symbol counter CR of the lower symbol sequence is updated. In updating the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR of the upper symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the lower symbol row are updated one by one in a single update process. The update times of the values do not overlap. As a result, every time the update process is executed three times, the set symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated for one set.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated out symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination, and if it is a reach symbol combination (YES in S4006), Further, in step S4007, it is determined whether or not it is a front-rear reach. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of front / rear out of reach (front / rear out symbol) (YES in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4008, and the combination of the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. Is stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach other than front / rear disengagement (design other than front / back disengagement) (NO in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time The combination is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear deviation of the RAM 553.

  If the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the process proceeds to step S4010 to determine whether or not the combination of the symbol symbols CL, CM, and CR is out of the combination, and the symbol is separated. If it is a combination of symbols (completely deviated symbols) (YES in S4010), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the combination of deviated symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely deviated symbol buffer of the RAM 553. If NO in both steps S4006 and S4010, the symbols are aligned at the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. In this case, the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are used as buffers. This process is terminated without storing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 28, in step S3903, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received. In this case, by confirming the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received. If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3904. On the other hand, if no command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3906.

  The command buffer of the RAM 553 temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261, and is composed of a ring buffer similar to the above.

  In the subsequent effect setting process in step S3905, for example, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. Accordingly, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined here, and a value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern command is set in the variation time measurement timer. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table associating, for example, a decoration symbol variation type and a variation pattern command as shown in FIG.

  The display command is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, based on information stored in the command buffer. Each time a necessary display command is generated.

  Here, the stop symbol is also determined based on the symbol command. As described above, when “A1” is set in the symbol command, any combination of symbols 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. If “A3” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer (see FIG. 29) of the RAM 553 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely off symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol.

  Then, a display command to be output to the display control device 45 is generated based on these pieces of information. Usually, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a normal variable data group, a reach effect data group, and the like. Basically, each data constituting these data groups is the variable time timer. Are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time order, thereby providing display effects according to various variation patterns. For example, the normal fluctuation data group includes normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2,..., And normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group includes reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2,. In the case of n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 →... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and subsequently reach effect data 1 → 2 → with the start of reach effect. ... → Data is sequentially output in the order of n.

  Then, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts a variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device. Once the variation pattern command is received from main controller 261, sub-control is performed until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (until the variation time timer set in step S3905 becomes 0). Under the cooperation of the device 262 and the display control device 45, the variable display of symbols is continued.

  Then, when the main control device 261 determines the jackpot, the special display device 43 displays that fact, and the decorative symbol is supplementally combined with the jackpot symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the special game video is displayed as the jackpot. Is displayed (a jackpot is started).

  In step S3906, other processing such as control settings for driving sounds and lamps and display control settings during display of the demonstration screen is performed, and then the present processing is terminated. For example, when a command for performing blinking control of the error display lamp 104 is received from the main control device 261, setting for controlling blinking of the error display lamp 104 is performed.

  As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the signal level input from the winning opening switch 221 and the like is monitored to make a ball entry determination, and the abnormality monitoring timer CT determines a predetermined opportunity from the time of a predetermined ball entry determination. The time until (when the first specified time or the second specified time has elapsed) is measured, and the abnormality is determined based on the elapsed time. If any abnormality is detected, a notification means such as the error display lamp 104 notifies the game hall related parties and the like. Thereby, for example, the radio wave goto as exemplified in the above-mentioned “problem to be solved by the invention” (detected by dividing the level signal output based on detecting the game ball that actually passes the winning opening switch 221 etc. Radio waves that increase the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “first radio waves”) and radio waves using the illegal large spheres (hereinafter referred to as “second radio waves”) are detected as radio waves. It is possible to detect early without providing a sensor, and thus to suppress the fraud.

  In addition, when a radio wave detection sensor is used as an anti-radio wave prevention measure, there is a possibility that a problem exemplified below may occur. For example, when it is intended to cover the entire gaming area where a plurality of entrance means are arranged with a single radio wave detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor with a wide detection range must be used, and radio waves that are not related to unauthorized radio waves. May be detected. On the other hand, when a radio wave detection sensor with a narrow detection range is provided corresponding to each ball entry means, there is a risk of increasing the number of parts, complicating the mounting structure, complicating electrical wiring, and the like.

  Further, in detecting the “first radio wave”, it is necessary to eliminate the influence of radio waves and the like unrelated to fraudulent acts. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection start interval is set to 36 msec or less. The number of times that abnormal abnormality is detected is counted, and an error notification is made only when the number of times becomes 50 or more. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to a true fraud, and the fraud can be efficiently prevented. As a result, it is possible for the game hall to avoid unnecessary troubles with the player, such as not issuing an alarm unnecessarily, and to manage the hall smoothly.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time measurement for detecting the “first radio wave goto” and the time measurement for detecting the “second radio wave goto” are performed by a common abnormality monitoring timer CT. Therefore, the configuration can be simplified.

[Second Embodiment]
The configuration according to the second embodiment will be described below. However, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32 as a variable winning means, a starting winning unit (first opportunity corresponding unit) 33 as a starting winning means, and a through gate (second opportunity corresponding port) 34. The variable display device unit 35, the first special display device 43L, the second special display device 43R, and the like are disposed in through holes formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and is sent to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15). A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, when there is a ball entering the start winning unit 33, there are three balls when there is a ball entering the general winning slot 31, and when there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32. Fifteen game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (lower plate 15).

  The start winning unit 33 includes an upper winning opening 33a (first starting entering means) and a lower winning opening 33b (second starting entering means), and a pair of opening and closing members provided on both sides of the lower winning opening 33b. 33c. The upper winning opening 33a allows a game ball to always enter, while the lower winning opening 33b is a game that flows down the gaming area by the opening / closing member 33c opening and closing in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition. The state can be changed between an open state in which a ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter. As will be described in detail later, the start winning unit 33 includes a first start winning switch (first opportunity corresponding unit switch) 224a and second detecting the game balls that have entered the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b. A start winning switch (second opportunity corresponding unit switch) 224b is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state is determined. The special display devices 43L and 43R (and the decorative symbol display device 42) perform variable display. And, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, a big hit state is given.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot types include “probable bonus jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, “surprise jackpot” and “JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot”.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the jackpot state of “probable jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot”, after the opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the specified time of 30 seconds is reached. One open / close operation (hereinafter referred to as “long open”) until a closed state is obtained on the condition that a predetermined number of 10 game balls have won a prize in the variable prize winning device 32 as one special prize state. This is repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds).

  In the big hit state of “surprising big hit”, after the opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, 0.4 seconds of the specified time has elapsed or the variable winning device 32 has a specified number of pieces. One open / close operation (hereinafter referred to as “short opening”) until the game is closed on condition that one game ball wins is regarded as one special prize state, and this is repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds). Is called.

  In the big hit state of “JUB jackpot”, “short open” is set as one special prize state, this is repeated 10 times at maximum, and then “long open” is set as one special prize state, and this is set to 9 Repeated once. In other words, a maximum of 10 “short releases” are performed in the first round, and “long releases” are performed in the second to tenth rounds.

  As mentioned above, in the jackpot states of “probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot” and “JUB jackpot”, a “long open” will be performed, so a large increase in gaming balls can be expected, but the “surprise jackpot” jackpot In the state, since only “short opening” is performed, the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit state is extremely small (an increase in game balls can hardly be expected).

  In addition, when “probable big hit”, “surprise big hit”, or “JUB big hit” occurs, a high probability state (high probability mode such as a probability variation mode described later) is given after the big hit state ends. However, since only “short open” is performed in the big hit state of “surprise big hit”, the player is given a surprise as if it suddenly shifted to the probable change mode without going into the big hit state. Can do. On the other hand, when “normal jackpot” occurs, a low probability state (low probability mode such as a time shortening mode, which will be described later) is given after the jackpot state ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, apart from the above various “big hits”, “small hits” are generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the above-mentioned lottery drawing. In the small hit state, similarly to the big hit state of “surprising big hit”, “short open” is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds). However, the game mode given after the small hit state is the original game mode before the small hit state occurs. For example, if the game mode before the small hit state is the probability change mode, the probability change mode is maintained even after the small hit state ends, and if the game mode before the small hit state is the normal mode, even after the small hit state ends Normal mode is maintained.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the top winning opening 33a and the case where it wins the bottom winning opening 33b, it is a big hit that is awarded when winning in the winning lottery The distribution of types is different. If you win the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the top winning award 33a, it will be assigned to either “probable big hit”, “normal big hit”, “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit” When the winning lottery with the game ball entering the lower prize opening 33b is won, the winning ballot is assigned to either “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”.

  The first and second special display devices 43 </ b> L and 43 </ b> R are configured by 7-segment display devices and are installed on the right side of the variable winning device 32. Then, when the game ball enters the top winning port 33a of the start winning unit 33, the first special display device 43L performs switching display (variable display), and the game ball enters the lower winning port 33b. As a trigger, switching display (variation display) is performed on the second special display device 43R. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not a big hit is determined is displayed depending on the display mode (for example, characters) when the variable display is stopped. The For example, when a game ball wins the top winning opening 33a, “-” → “7” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” → “−” on the corresponding first special display device 43L. “→... Is displayed at high speed (for example, every 4 msec), and when a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, when the big hit lottery is won, any one of “7”, “3”, “2”, and “1” is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and a big win state is generated. However, as will be described later, when the game ball wins the lower winning opening 33b, “surprise big hit” and “JUB big hit” do not occur, so “2” and “1” are displayed in the second special display device 43R. The decision is not displayed.

  Specifically, when “probable big hit” is given, “7” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when “normal big hit” is given, the first Alternatively, when “3” is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R, and “Abrupt big hit” is given, “2” is stopped on the first special display device 43L and “JUB big hit” is given. When this is done, “1” is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 43L.

  When “small hit” is given, “0” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R.

  In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). However, if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed in either case, “-” is displayed in both cases. Not limited to this, other configurations may be adopted. For example, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the content previously stopped and displayed on the other (for example, the previous “1” is stopped) If it is displayed, “1”) is displayed as it is, and if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed, the contents stopped and displayed last time are displayed as they are in both. It is good also as a structure.

  In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning unit 33 during the variation display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variation display is performed at that time. It is the structure performed after the end of. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the game ball won in the top winning port 33a and the game ball won in the lower winning port 33b. Then, the variation display up to four times (total eight variation display) is put on hold. In addition, the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. If a new game ball wins the start winning unit 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  Basically, the variable display triggered by winning in the top winning opening 33a is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the top winning opening 33a and is digested in the order in which they entered, and the bottom winning opening 33b. The change display triggered by winning a prize is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the lower winning opening 33b and digested in the order in which they entered. However, when both the variable display triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a and the variable display triggered by entering the lower winning opening 33b are held (the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding hold) In the case where one or more lamps 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the entry into the lower prize opening 33b is preferentially digested. In other words, unless all the variable displays triggered by winning in the lower winning opening 33b are digested, the variable display triggered by entering the upper winning opening 33a is not performed. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the lower winning opening 33b and one second holding lamp 46b lights, the player enters the upper winning opening 33a. The change display that is triggered is postponed, and the change display that is triggered by the ball entering the lower prize opening 33b is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation display triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a is also referred to as “first fluctuation display”, and the fluctuation display triggered by entering the lower winning opening 33b is referred to as “second fluctuation display”. Is also referred to.

  Further, the through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. The through gate 34 includes a through gate switch (second opportunity corresponding port switch) 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225. An open lottery for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 is in an open state is performed, and a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. When the winning lottery is won, the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

  The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device that variably displays in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 35 indicates a variation indicating whether the variation display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to which of the top winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b. A lamp 40, the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b, and a holding lamp 44 are provided.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display at that time. It has become. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the command from the main control device 261 as the main control means (control means) is set so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Based on this, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 262, and display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of symbols (numerals) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area. The symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each display region (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display region → the lower symbol display region → the middle symbol display region). For example, when “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit” is confirmed in the main controller 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and the jackpot state is started. In the case of “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”, as will be described later, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 does not correspond to the big hit.

  Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in combinations corresponding to jackpots, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, for example, as a preceding stage. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state.

  If the big hit state does not occur even if the reach state occurs, the symbols different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Further, in the case of “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot”, the numbers of the blue eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as described above, but “surprise jackpot” or “JUB jackpot” In such a case, a predetermined combination of specific numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of the doublet. For example, in the present embodiment, “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. Of course, the combination of specific numbers that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be different depending on whether the “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”. In addition, in the case of “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”, it will be displayed in a stop combination with a random deviation on the surface as well as when it is off, instead of a predetermined combination of numbers. It may be.

  In addition, the variation specifying lamp 40 includes a blue light emitting LED and a red light emitting LED, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a variation display triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a. When the display is changed, the light is emitted in blue, and when the variable display is triggered by the entry into the lower prize opening 33b, the light is emitted in red.

  The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entrance 151 is provided in the upper portion of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 along the side of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via a warp channel 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed at the center back side of the stage 153. . The pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 that leads to a game area directly above the start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a), and a game ball that has entered the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability. The start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a) is entered.

  As described above, the variable prize-winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and when a special game state such as a big win or a small win occurs, it is in an open state in which the game ball can be won. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 as a success / failure random number generating means used for a jackpot lottery (whether / not-win lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a jackpot type as a type random number generating means used for determining the jackpot type The determination counter C2 (corresponding to the mode determination counter C2 in the first embodiment), the variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1 Initial value random number counter CINI used for value setting, variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determination of variation display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and normal symbols Lottery of the display device 41 (open lottery for determining whether or not the opening / closing member 33c of the start winning unit 33 is opened) It is set to be used and normal symbol random number counter C4 to use. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined based on the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the variation pattern are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special variable reservation area as a storage area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas).

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable storage area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the top winning opening 33a. Stored. In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the lower winning opening 33b. Stored. In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times as described above.

  In detail, each jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 599) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. The value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper winning hole 33a or the lower winning hole 33b of the start winning unit 33 is changed to the first special variable holding area or the first 2 Stored in the special variable holding area. There are two types of random numbers that are jackpots: a low probability state (low probability mode such as normal mode and time reduction mode) and a high probability state (high probability mode such as probability variation mode). In the low probability state, the number of random number values that are jackpots is two, the values are “7, 307”, and in the high probability state, the number of random number values that are jackpots is 20, The values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. That is, in the low probability state, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/300 (a jackpot state occurs), and in the high probability state, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/30. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success / failure determination table as a winning value storage means that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. In the present embodiment, there are two success / failure determination tables, and there are a first success / failure determination table storing “7, 307” and a second success / failure determination table storing “8-16, 308-316”.

  The value of the big hit random number counter C1 is also used when determining “small hit”. The value of the random number for “small hit” is one, and the value is “150”.

  Here, various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, the game mode (game state) is switched between “normal mode”, “probability change mode”, and “time reduction mode”.

  “Normal mode” refers to a normal state that is not “probability change mode” or “time reduction mode”. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state) is a normal low probability (for example, 1/300). That is, the “normal mode” of the present embodiment is a low probability mode to which a time shortening state and a high pitching state described later are not added.

  “Probability change mode” means that “7” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R (the probability change symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42), and “probability change big hit” is thereby achieved. Or “2” or “1” is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 43L (the chance symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42) or “JUN jackpot” or “JUB jackpot” In other words, the jackpot probability after the jackpot ends is higher than that in the “normal mode” (for example, 1/30). The “probability change mode” continues until the next jackpot state occurs.

  Furthermore, in the “probability change mode” of the present embodiment, not only the jackpot probability is increased, but also the time display state in which the variable display time in the special display devices 43L and 43R is short is reduced. In addition, as compared with the “normal mode”, the opening time of the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) per winning is longer and the number of opening is increased. As a result, the time period during which the start winning unit 33 is in the open state is lengthened, so that a high winning state in which game balls frequently enter the starting winning unit 33 (the lower winning opening 33b) becomes a big hit lottery. Will be done continuously and will be in good condition. That is, the “probability change mode” of the present embodiment is a high probability mode to which a time reduction state and a high pitching state are added.

  In “probability change mode”, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, or the probability that the “○” symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 (winning probability of the open lottery) is set to “normal mode”. It is good also as making it high and making it into a high pitched state.

  In the “time reduction mode”, the first or second special display device 43L, 43R is stopped and displayed with “3” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a normal symbol other than a predetermined probability variation symbol). The game mode is set over a total of 100 variable displays performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R after the jackpot state ends. The “time reduction mode” has the same low probability as the jackpot probability in the “normal mode”, and the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the start winning unit 33 is higher than the ratio in the “normal mode”. It is a game mode. That is, except for the difference in the jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state), the state is the same as the “probability change mode”. That is, the “time reduction mode” of the present embodiment is a low probability mode to which a time reduction state and a high pitching state are added. In the “time reduction mode”, even if a big hit state does not occur, after the variable display is performed 100 times in total on the special display devices 43L and 43R, the mode shifts to the “normal mode”.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is configured such that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter C2 determines which of the jackpot types, that is, “probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”, “surprise jackpot”, or “JUB jackpot” is given. .

  The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table as a jackpot type determination value storage means that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, and the first jackpot type determination table that is considered when a game ball wins the top winning opening 33a and the game ball wins the top winning opening 33a. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is considered in some cases.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the top winning opening 33a, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “probable jackpot” is given, and “6, 7”. For example, if “8-11” is determined, “JUB jackpot” is determined. If “12-19”, “ordinary jackpot” is determined. In other words, if the winning lottery with the winning of the top winning opening 33a is won, it becomes “probable big hit” with a probability of 30%, “surprise big hit” with a probability of 10%, and “ “JUB jackpot” and “normal jackpot” with a probability of 40%.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the bottom winning opening 33b, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “0 to 11”, the “probable jackpot” is determined to be given. Giving "Big Bonus" is decided. That is, when winning or failing lottery with the winning of the lower winning opening 33b is won, it becomes “probable big hit” with a probability of 60% and “ordinary big hit” with a probability of 40%. As described above, when the game ball wins the lower winning opening 33b, the “surprise big hit” and the “JUB big hit” do not occur.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. The value of the big hit type determination counter C2 stored in the big win type determination counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the top winning port 33a or the lower winning port 33b of the start winning unit 33 is changed to a special variable holding area ( Stored in the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation holding area).

  Further, the variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. In this embodiment, after the reach is generated with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped, and the last stop after the occurrence of reach is also performed. It is decided to draw “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and “Complete detachment” where no reach occurs. In the present embodiment, the reach determination table referred to when determining whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach state and which reach corresponds to the ROM 502. Is provided. In the reach determination table, a value of “0 to 238” is stored, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the reach out of front and back, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration that corresponds to a detachment.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area (first area) of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b of the start winning unit 33. Stored in the special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation holding area).

  In the present embodiment, when “probability jackpot” or “normal jackpot” occurs, any one of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected, and when “out-of-back reach” occurs, Either normal reach or super reach is selected, and when “reach other than front / rear out” occurs, normal reach is selected. In addition, in the case of “completely off”, none of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, after reaching 9 and to the lower limit value of 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won is six and the range is “3 to 8.” When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. Is performed for a predetermined time, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state for a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, the probability that the symbol corresponding to the winning is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, that is, the winning probability of the open lottery for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 is in the open state is in any mode. But it is common. However, as described above, in the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode”, the change time of the change display performed in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened compared to the case of the “normal mode”. . Of course, as described above, the winning probability of the open lottery may be changed according to the game mode.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified as in the first embodiment. The main processing is started when the power is turned on, the timer interrupt processing is started periodically (in this embodiment at a cycle of 2 msec), and the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to (non-maskable terminal).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 38, first, in step U301, various incoming ball detection switch reading processes are executed. As will be described in detail later, here, the state of various ball detection switches connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  In step U302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step U303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). , 238, 9) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step U304, a start winning process associated with winning the start winning unit 33 is executed, and in step U305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the switch reading process in step U301 will be described in detail. In this switch reading process, each ball detection switch (award opening switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switch 224a, 224b, through gate switch 225) is individually monitored and the same process is performed individually. . Therefore, although the switch reading process related to the winning opening switch 221 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 39 as an example, the same process as the process shown in FIG. The function of the switch reading process in step U301 constitutes the ball entry determining means in this embodiment.

  First, in step U3101, the signal level of the input signal from the winning prize switch 221 is checked. The function of this processing constitutes the signal monitoring means in this embodiment.

  For example, when the game ball is not passing through the passage hole of the winning opening switch 221, a high level signal (H) of + 12V is output from the winning opening switch 221 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32A), and main control is performed. On the device 261 side, a low level signal (L) having a reference potential of 0 V is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229 (see timing t1 in FIG. 32B). FIG. 32A is a timing chart for explaining an output signal from the winning opening switch 221, and FIG. 32B is a timing chart for explaining an input signal to the CPU 501.

  On the other hand, while a game ball enters the general winning port 31 and the game ball is passing through the passage hole of the winning port switch 221, a low level signal (L) is output from the winning port switch 221 [ In the main controller 261 side, the high level signal (H) is input to the CPU 501 via the inverting circuit 229 (see timings t2 and t3 in FIG. 32B).

  In the following step U3102, the signal level checked in step U3101 is stored in the signal level buffer for the winning opening switch 221 provided in the work area of the RAM 503.

  The signal level buffer is provided corresponding to each ball detection switch (winning port switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switch 224a, 224b, through gate switch 225), and for each ball detection switch. Each signal level is stored. The signal level buffer corresponds to the level storage means in this embodiment.

  In addition, the latest 200 msec data, that is, 100 cycles of data is stored in the ring buffer that constitutes each signal level buffer of this embodiment, and the oldest data beyond this is erased in order. Yes. Further, the position of the read pointer indicates a predetermined address position where the latest data is stored. As described later, the data for the past plural times is read based on the position of the read pointer. .

  Returning to the description of step U3102, each time the signal level is checked at a cycle of 2 msec, a logical value corresponding to the signal level is sequentially written in a predetermined address position indicated by the write pointer in the signal level buffer for the winning opening switch 221. To go. Here, when the signal level of the input signal to the CPU 501 is “H (high)”, a logical value “1” is stored as level information indicating this, and the signal level is “L (low)”. Stores a logical value “0” as level information indicating this.

  Thereafter, in step U3103, a calculation process which is a pre-process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 31 is performed.

  More specifically, logical inversion processing is performed on the earliest data (oldest data) of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer, and the earliest data that has been logically inverted and the remaining 2 data. Calculate the logical product of all the batch data. Then, this value is temporarily stored in the work area of the RAM 503. The function of this processing constitutes the logic inversion means and the logical product calculation means in this embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the logical values of the signal levels stored at timings t1, t2, and t3 are “0”, “1”, and “1”, the logical inversion of the earliest data When processing is performed, the earliest data is “1”. Therefore, the logical product of this data and the other two data is “1”.

  In the following step U3104, it is determined whether or not the logical product value calculated in step U3103 is “1”. Here, when the logical product value is “1”, it means that the signal level has been switched from “L” to “H”. In step U3105, “1” is set to the value of the ball entry determination flag for the winning hole switch 221 (general winning hole 31), and this process is terminated. In addition, the entrance discrimination flag is a discriminator for discriminating whether or not there is an entrance and is provided corresponding to each entrance detection switch. In the start winning process in step U304 and the through gate passing process in step U305, the presence / absence of a ball is determined based on this.

  On the other hand, when the logical product value is “0”, the signal level remains “L” or “H” for the past 4 msec, or the signal level does not switch from “H” to “L”. Therefore, it is determined that there is no entry to the general winning opening 31, and in step U3106, the value of the entering determination flag for the winning opening switch 221 is set to “0”. Exit.

  Here, the start winning process in step U304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The execution area of the special variable holding area and each holding area include a jackpot random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area is provided for storing the values. In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number storage area stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. The jackpot type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area each use 1 byte to store the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  First, in step U501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the lower winning opening 33b based on the value of the above-mentioned winning determination flag corresponding to the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step U501, in step U502, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the lower winning opening 33b is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4”). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step U502, the process proceeds to step U509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U502, the process proceeds to step U503, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the following step U504, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update processing in the above step U303 are obtained from the vacant reserved areas in the second special variable reserved area. Store in the first area. After step U504, the process proceeds to step U505.

  In step U505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In subsequent step U506, when it is determined in step U505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, it is based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variable holding area. Then, the second mode determination process for determining the type of jackpot is performed. Details of the second mode determination process will be described later.

  In the following step U507, when it is determined in step U505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. After step U507, the process proceeds to step U509. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step U505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot (value stored in the first hit / fail judgment table) “7”, “307”. It is discriminated whether it matches either of the above. In FIG. 41, for the sake of convenience, the process of step U5101 is described in a simplified manner. However, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “307”. If an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step U5101, which determination is made. If a negative determination is made at step U5101, a negative determination is made at step U5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U 5101, that is, if it is determined that a big hit state occurs, the big win winning flag is turned on in step U 5102, and then the process proceeds to step U 5105.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5101, it is determined in step U5103 whether or not a high probability state flag, which will be described later, is on, and whether or not it is a high probability state (high probability mode such as probability variation mode). Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U5103, that is, if the state is a high probability state, in step U5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is stored in the second success / failure determination table. It is determined whether or not any of “8 to 16, 308 to 316”. Note that in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U5104, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs in the high probability state, the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step U5102, and the process proceeds to step U5105.

  If a negative determination is made in step U5103 or step U5104, that is, if it is “out”, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Further, in step U5105, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area matches the value “150” corresponding to the small hit.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U5105, that is, if it is determined that a small hit state is generated, the small win winning flag is turned on in step U5106, and then the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5105, the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the second mode determination processing in step U506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5201, it is determined whether or not the big win winning flag is set in the big hit determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step U5201, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5201, in step U5202, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is set to “normal” in consideration of the second jackpot type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “12 to 19” corresponding to “big hit”. If a negative determination is made in step U5202, that is, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is any of the values “0 to 11” corresponding to “probable variation jackpot”, the probability variation flag is turned on in step U5203. Then, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5202, the normal flag is turned on in step U5204, and then this process ends.

  Next, the reach determination process in step U507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5301, it is determined whether or not a winning flag (a big win winning flag or a small win winning flag) has been set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5301, that is, if a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5301, that is, if a big hit state does not occur, in step U5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is taken into account in the reach determination table. Is determined to be equal to one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “out-of-front / rear reach”. If the determination in step U5302 is affirmative, in step U5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5302, the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is referred to in step U5304 as “reach other than front / rear out”. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values “2 to 21” corresponding to. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5304, the flag is turned on other than before and after in step U5305, and then this process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step U5304, that is, if it is “completely off”, this processing is terminated as it is.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, after the process of step U507, or when a negative determination is made in step U501, in step U509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a. The determination is made based on the value of the above-described entrance determination flag corresponding to the switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step U509, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step U510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4”). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step U510, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U510, the process proceeds to step U511 to increment the upper hold counter Na by one.

  In the following step U512, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the reserved areas that are free in the first special variable suspension area. After step U512, the process proceeds to step U513.

  In step U513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination process in step U513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step U505, and only the point that the information related to the variable display to be processed is based on the ball entering the top winning opening 33a. Different. For this reason, detailed description is omitted for convenience.

  In the following step U514, when it is determined in step U513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variable holding area. Then, a first mode determination process for determining the type of jackpot is performed. Details of the first mode determination process will be described later.

  In the following step U515, when it is determined in step U513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. After step U515, this process ends. Note that the reach determination process in step U515 is the same as the reach determination process in step U507, except that the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the top winning opening 33a. For this reason, detailed description is omitted for convenience.

  Next, the first mode determination process in step U514 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U5401, it is determined whether or not the big win winning flag is set in the big hit determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step U5401, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U5401, in step U5402, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variable holding area is set to “normal” in consideration of the first jackpot type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “12 to 19” corresponding to “big hit”. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5402, the normal flag is turned on in step U5403, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5402, in step U5404, the first jackpot type determination table is considered, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is any of the values “8 to 11” corresponding to “JUB jackpot”. It is determined whether or not they match. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5404, the JUB flag is turned on in step U5405, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5404, in step U5406, the first jackpot type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is any of the values “6, 7” corresponding to “surprise big hit”. It is determined whether or not they match. If an affirmative determination is made in step U5406, the susceptibility flag is turned on in step U5407, and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U5406, the probability variation flag is turned on in step U5408, and then this process ends.

  In addition, the mode determination means in this embodiment is comprised by the 2nd mode determination process of step U506, the 1st mode determination process of step U514, etc.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step U305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step U601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225.

  If a negative determination is made in step U601, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, in step U602, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step U603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step U604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step U303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the process of steps U201 to U210 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps U211 and U212 is executed in the remaining time.

  First, in step U201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R, the start winning unit 33, etc. updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing that is transmitted to the control device is executed. Here are some more specific examples.

  For example, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been awarded to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 with reference to the various winning determination flags, and if there is a winning prize ball corresponding to the number corresponding to the winning prize. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Then, after the transmission of the command, the value of the corresponding entry discrimination flag is returned to “0”.

  Further, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

  Also, in the external output process, information for grasping the game state is output to the hall computer of the game hall in consideration of various discrimination information such as a jackpot / medium flag described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

  For example, when a ball entry error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and there is no ball entry error. , An off signal is output.

  Further, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the decorative symbol variation, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to display (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, for example, in the “normal mode”, “FF08”, “FF09”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, “FF16” , “FF17” is set as the variation pattern command. Similarly, in the “probability change mode”, “FD07”, “FD08”, “FD09”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, “FD16”, “FD17” are set. The In the “time reduction mode”, “FE07”, “FE08”, “FE09”, “FE11”, “FE12”, “FE13”, “FE14”, “FE15”, “FE16”, “FE17” are set. .

  On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 executes the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, “FF11” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD11” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE11” is set in the “time reduction mode”. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time from which the normal reach is derived is “20 seconds” in “normal mode”, “8 seconds” in “probability mode”, and “10 seconds” in “time reduction mode”. Is set.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types (super reach SR1, SR2, SR3) of 30 second, 40 second, and 50 second patterns are prepared for the super reach in the “normal mode”. The variation display time in the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode” is shortened compared to the “normal mode” in the same manner as the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of super reach SR1, “FF12” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD12” in the “probability change mode”, and “FE12” in the “time reduction mode” are set as the change pattern commands. The In the case of the super reach SR2, “FF13” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD13” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE13” is set in the “time reduction mode”. In the case of the super reach SR3, “FF14” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD14” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE14” is set in the “time reduction mode”.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. In the premium reach of this embodiment, two types (premium reach PR1, PR2) of 60-second and 70-second patterns are prepared in the “normal mode”. The variation display time in the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode” is shortened compared to the “normal mode” in the same manner as the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of premium reach PR1, “FF15” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD15” in the “probability change mode”, “FE15” in the “time reduction mode”, and the change pattern command is set. The In the premium reach PR2, “FF16” is set in the “normal mode”, “FD16” is set in the “probability change mode”, and “FE16” is set in the “time reduction mode”.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to “completely missed” that does not reach any reach state is an upper hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) triggered by winning in the top winning opening 33a. Depending on the difference between the total value (total number of holds) and the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds in the variable display (second change display) triggered by entering the lower prize opening 33b. Multiple settings are made. In the present embodiment, three types of patterns of 10 seconds, 5 seconds, and 3 seconds (“completely disconnected (10 s)”, “completely disconnected (5 s)”, and “completely disconnected (3 s)”) are prepared. However, the “completely off (3 s)” pattern can be output only in the “probability change mode” or the “time reduction mode”.

  Specifically, when the total number of holds is “0” to “2” in “normal mode”, “FF09” corresponding to “completely off (10 s)” is set as the fluctuation pattern command, and “normal mode” If the total number of holds is “3” or more, “FF08” corresponding to “complete out (5 s)” is set.

  When the total number of holds is “0” in the “probability change mode”, “FD09” corresponding to “complete out (10 s)” is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and in the “probability change mode”, the total number of holds is “ In the case of “1” to “3”, “FD08” corresponding to “completely off (5 s)” is set, and when the total number of holdings is “4” or more in “probability mode”, “completely off” “FD07” corresponding to “(3s)” is set.

  When the total hold count is “0” in the “time reduction mode”, “FE09” corresponding to “completely off (10 s)” is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the total hold count in the “time reduction mode”. Is “1” to “3”, “FE08” corresponding to “completely off (5 s)” is set, and when the total number of holds is “4” or more in the “time reduction mode”, “FE07” corresponding to “completely off (3 s)” is set.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit” is reached, the reach state is not generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are displayed. “3”, “4”, and “1” symbols (chance symbols) are stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the case of “small hit”, the chance symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas without causing the reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42. As a result, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can distinguish between “JUB jackpot” that is more advantageous to the player and “surprise jackpot” or “small jackpot” that is not so advantageous. Therefore, since it can be expected that “JUB jackpot” will occur, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's preference. In this embodiment, “FF17” is set as the variation pattern command in the “normal mode” and the variation pattern command corresponding to “surprise big hit”, “JUB big hit”, and “small hit”, and in the probability variation mode. “FD17” and “FE17” are set in the time reduction mode.

  As described above, the variation pattern command has a 2-byte structure. Of the command consisting of 2 bytes, the first byte (upper byte) is composed of mode information that can determine the game mode at that time. More specifically, “FF” corresponds to mode information indicating “normal mode”, “FD” corresponds to mode information indicating “probability mode”, and “FE” corresponds to mode information indicating “time reduction mode”. Equivalent to.

  The second byte (lower byte) is composed of time information related to effects such as normal reach and pattern information corresponding to more specific instruction contents indicating a variation pattern.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation symbols, a normal symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a complete out symbol design combination. 6 divisions, that is, combination of chance symbols, are designated. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “A1”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, “A6”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described.

  The combination of probability variation symbols is a combination of symbols composed of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 and “A1” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of probability variation symbols. Then, when “A1” indicating the probability variation symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 in the form of a slot. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of normal symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8, and “A2” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of normal symbols. Then, when “A2” indicating the normal symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “A3” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “A4” is set in the command. The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “A5” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols. In addition, “A6” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is one type of chance symbol, and in this example, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are “3”, “4”, and “1” from the top.

  As will be described in detail later, when “A3” to “A5” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. When “A6” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, three commands “A3” to “A5” are prepared as the symbol commands for removal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration with only one symbol command for separation is also possible. Good.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step U202, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step U203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step U204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step U205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what control is performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the jackpot determination and decoration in the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. A design variation pattern is set. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step U206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. Thereby, when the big hit state or the small win state is reached, the opening / closing process of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In Step U207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step U208, an opportunity handling unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the start winning unit 33 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the start winning unit 33.

  After that, in step U209, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If no information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step U210 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step U201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step U201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step U211 and step U212).

  That is, in step U211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step U212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step U202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps U201 to U209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly change The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step U209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step U213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step U213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step U214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step U215. To remember. Thereafter, in step U216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step U217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step U218, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step U209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps U201 to U208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps U211 and U212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step U213), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is shut off, and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step U205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 45, in step U801, referring to various hitting hit flags (big hit hitting flag and small hitting hitting flag), which will be described later in detail, whether or not it is currently hitting (during a big hit state or a small hit state). Is determined. The hit state (big hit state and small hit state) includes the middle of the hit state and a predetermined time after the hit state ends. The predetermined time after the end of the hit state is the time until the normal game (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) starts after the end of the hit state. Generally, this time zone is a decorative symbol display. The device 42 displays the end of the hit state or displays various modes given after the hit. In addition, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the win in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 until the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is opened. (In general, this time zone is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 to indicate the start of the hit state).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U801, that is, if the winning state is in effect, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U801, in step U802, a first display described in detail later is made. By looking at the setting state of the middle flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is in a variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is set (on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the first display flag is released (off state), the variable is displayed. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the display stop state is in progress. As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step U920), and the first and second special displays are performed. It is turned off when the fluctuation display of the devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step U814).

  If a negative determination is made in step U802, that is, if the winning state is not being displayed and the variation is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step U803, and the variation display (second variation) triggered by entering the lower winning hole 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb for counting the number of hold (display) is greater than zero.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U803, that is, if even one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step U804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is held and stored by the determination processing in step U803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step U805, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variable holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step U805, in step U806, the process of turning on / off the second holding lamp 46b and the process of causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step U807.

  If a negative determination is made in step U803, that is, if no second variation display is stored on hold, a variation display (first display) triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a in step U808. It is determined whether or not an upper hold counter Na for counting the number of hold (variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step U808, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step U809. In the following step U810, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step U810, in step U811, a process for turning on / off the first hold lamp 46a and a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step U807. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  In step U807, a variable display setting process is performed. Here, details of the variation display setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U901, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small win winning flag is ON.

  Here, when it is determined that it corresponds to the small hit, the process proceeds to step U910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step U902.

  In step U902, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is ON.

  Here, if it is determined that it corresponds to the jackpot, the process proceeds to step U903. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made, that is, when it is out of place, the process proceeds to step U912.

  In step U903, it is determined whether or not the variation display corresponds to “probability large hit” by determining whether or not the probability variation flag is ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U903, ie, “probable variation jackpot”, the variation pattern corresponding to “probability variation jackpot” is determined in step U904 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U905, the probability variation symbol (“A1” in the present embodiment) is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  If a negative determination is made in step U903, the process proceeds to step U906, where it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display corresponds to “normal jackpot” by determining whether or not the normal flag is on. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step U906, that is, if it is “ordinary jackpot”, the variation pattern corresponding to “ordinary jackpot” is determined in step U907 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U908, the normal symbol (“A2” in the present embodiment) is set as the symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  In steps U904 and U907, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and the decorative symbols are displayed based on the values of the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The pattern variation mode is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are tables for each game mode, as in the first embodiment. Etc. in advance.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step U906, the process proceeds to step U909 to determine whether or not the suddenness flag or the JUB flag is on, so that the fluctuation display becomes “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. If an affirmative determination is made in step U909, that is, if it is a “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit”, the process proceeds to step U910.

  In step U910, a fluctuation pattern (chance fluctuation pattern) corresponding to “surprise big hit”, “JUB big hit”, and “small hit” is determined and set in the fluctuation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U911, the chance symbol ("A6" in this embodiment) is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920. As described above, the variation pattern commands corresponding to “surprise big hit”, “JUB big hit” and “small hit” are “FF17” in “normal mode” and “probable change mode” depending on the gaming state. “FE17” is set in “FD17” and “time reduction mode”.

  If a negative determination is made in step U902, that is, if it is “out”, it is determined in step U912 whether or not the front / rear flag is on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U912, that is, if “rearward / rearward reach” is determined, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to “rearward / rearward reach” is determined in step U913, the fluctuation pattern command is set, and the front / rear flag is set. Turn off. Thereafter, in step U914, the back and forth symbols are set as symbol commands, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step U915 whether or not the other than front and rear flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step U915, that is, if “reach other than front / rear off” is determined, a variation pattern corresponding to “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is determined in step U916 and set as a variation pattern command. Turn off all other flags. Thereafter, in step U917, symbols other than back and forth are set as symbol commands, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  If a negative determination is made in step U915, that is, if it is “completely out”, an outlier variation pattern is determined in step U918 and set in a variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step U919, the completely off symbol is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step U920.

  When the fluctuation pattern at the time of “out” is determined in step U913, step U916, and step U918, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. This is the same as Step U904 and Step U907. For example, in the case of a complete departure (C3 = 22 to 238), when the total number of holdings is “0” to “2” in the “normal mode” regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. , “FF09” corresponding to “completely out (10 s)” is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and when “total mode” is “3” or more in “normal mode”, it corresponds to “completely out (5 s)” “FF08” is set.

  In addition, the symbol commands in steps U914, U917, and U919 indicate a predetermined division of the combination of symbols that are out of the same manner as in steps U905 and U908. Specifically, when “A3” indicating the combination of the front and rear off symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command stores the front and rear stored in the front and rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment reach is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” indicating a combination of symbols other than the front / rear detachment is set in the symbol command, the sub-control unit displays a combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than the front / rear detachment stored in the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. 262 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” indicating a combination of completely disconnected symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 uses the combination of symbols stored in the completely disconnected symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

  In step U920, start setting processing is performed to indicate that a condition for performing switching display (variation display) is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and the first display timer setting process is performed. The first display timer is a means for measuring the variation time (residual time for variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation display. . In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the first display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43L and 43R, switching display (variation display) is started. The special display devices 43L and 43R are 7-segment display devices as described above. If the displayed character is “−”, it is “7”, if it is “7”, it is “3”, and if it is “3”. “2”, “2” is “1”, “1” is “0”, “0” is “−” (however, regarding the second special display device 42R, “2”, “ “1” is not displayed, and if the displayed character is “3”, the display is switched to “0”). Then, after step U920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 45, if an affirmative determination is made in step U802, that is, if a variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step U812 to perform a first display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step U813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step U813.

  If a negative determination is made in step U813, in step U817, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process ends. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, "7" if the currently displayed character is "-", "3" if "7", "2" if "3", "1" if "2" "," 1 "is set to" 0 "," 0 "is set to"-"(however, regarding the second special display device 43R," 3 "is set to" 0 "). . Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U813, the first display flag is released (turned off) in step U814, and stop display setting is performed in step U815 to perform stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R. . Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. In other words, when “probability big hit” with transition to “probability change mode” is displayed, “7” is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and “normal big hit” with transition to “time reduction mode” is displayed. In some cases, “3” is stopped and displayed, “2” is stopped when “probability big hit” with transition to “probability change mode” is displayed, and “JUB big win with change to“ probability change mode ”is displayed. "1" is stopped and displayed, "0" is stopped and displayed when it is "small hit", and "-" is stopped and displayed when it is off. Again, such a stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary.

  Subsequently, after the discrimination information setting process is performed in step U816, the present process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step U1001, the big hit winning flag and the small win winning flag are taken into consideration to determine whether or not the stop display corresponds to a big win or a small win. Here, in the case of corresponding to a big hit or a small win, the process proceeds to step U1002, and a hit setting is performed. Specifically, setting processing of a big hit / medium flag, a small hit / medium flag, a first variable flag, a first variable timer, an opening number counter, a winning counter, and the like is performed. And after completion | finish of step U1002, a discrimination | determination information setting process is complete | finished.

  The big hit flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the big hit state is being set. Here, “1” indicating the occurrence of the big hit state is set (turned on) as a flag value.

  The small hitting flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the small hitting state is in effect, and here, similarly to the big hitting medium flag, “1” indicating the occurrence of the small hitting state is set as the flag value. (Turned on).

  The first variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is in an open state.

  The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time (occurrence time of the special prize state) of the variable winning device 32, the interval between the special prize states, and the like, and is defined from the opening start or opening end of the opening / closing member 32a. This is taken into account when determining whether or not time has elapsed. In the hit setting process in step U1002 in the present embodiment, “7500” or “100” is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32a is set to “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”. In the present embodiment, “7500” is set in the first variable timer in the case of “long open”, and “100” is set in the first variable timer in the case of “short open”.

  The opening number counter is used to determine the number of occurrences of the special prize state executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed (“long open” or “short open”). In the hit setting process at step U1002 in this embodiment, “10” indicating 10 times is set as the counter value.

  The winning counter is a winning counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In the present embodiment, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32 based on the value of the ball determination flag corresponding to the count switch 223. When it is determined that there is a ball entering the winning device 32, the value of the winning counter Vx is incremented by one.

  In the hit setting process in step U1002, the specified number K1 that is the maximum expected number of balls to be entered into the variable winning device 32 per one opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing member 32a is set. As described above, the prescribed number K1 is determined in advance for each opening type (operating mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation) such as “long opening” or “short opening”. For example, “10” is set as the specified number K1 if “long open”, and “1” is set as the specified number K1 if “short open”. Note that a scheduled number-of-entry determination table (see FIG. 54) that defines the correspondence between the release type and the maximum number of planned entries (specified number K1) is stored in the ROM 502, and is referred to when performing such setting processing. The

  If it is determined in step U1001 that the jackpot or the jackpot does not correspond, that is, the jackpot winning flag and the jackpot winning flag are off, the process proceeds to step U1003.

  In step U1003, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0”. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed). As described later, “100” is set as the counter value after the “normal jackpot” is completed.

  If the counter value of the variation counter is “0”, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (when the counter value is other than “0”), it is considered that the time reduction state is being set, and in step U1004, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1. The process proceeds to step U1005.

  In step U1005, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the 100th variation display after the end of the “normal jackpot” (after the provision of the time reduction state). Here, if the value of the variation counter is “0”, a process of turning off a high-ball entering state flag, which will be described later, is performed in step U1006, and a process of turning off a time shortening state flag, which will be described later, is performed in step U1007. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step U1005 that the counter value of the variation counter is not “0”, this process is terminated.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step U206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The function of the variable winning device control process constitutes the opening / closing control means in this embodiment.

  First, in step U1201, it is determined whether or not the big hit / medium flag is on. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1202, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the first variable timer in the subsequent step U1202.

  In the following step U1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made here, that is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step U1204, whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is “0”, that is, 1 of the opening / closing member 32a. It is determined whether or not an open time (specified time “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”) per opening / closing operation (“long open” or “short open”) remains.

  If a negative determination is made in step U1204, the process proceeds to step U1205, and whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the prescribed number K1, that is, the game ball that won the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of balls has reached the maximum planned number of balls (the prescribed number “10” or “1”). If a negative determination is made in step U1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize-winning device 32 (the timing for finishing the special prize state) has not yet arrived, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U1204 or step U1205, the process proceeds to step U1206, where the first variable timer and determination value K2 are set.

  Here, the first variable timer includes whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the big win or the small prize, In this embodiment, a value “750” corresponding to “3 seconds” is set to determine whether or not an interval until the special prize state is started.

  The determination value K2 is a value for determining whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 in a single special prize state (including the predetermined time after completion of the special prize state) is appropriate. It is. The determination value K2 is determined in advance for each opening type (operating mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation) such as “long opening” or “short opening”. For example, “13” is set as the determination value K2 if “long open”, and “3” is set as the determination value K2 if “short open”. Note that a determination value determination table (see FIG. 54) as a determination value storage unit that defines the correspondence between the open type and the determination value K2 is stored in the ROM 502, and is referred to when performing such setting processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step U1207, whether the counter value of the release number counter is “0”, that is, whether the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has reached the prescribed number of 10 times. Determine whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1207, it is determined in step U1208 whether or not the JUB flag is on, thereby determining whether or not the variable winning device control process corresponds to “JUB jackpot”. Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1208, a setting change process is performed in step U1209, and this process ends.

  In the setting change process in step U1209, the specified number K1 related to one special prize state is changed from “1” corresponding to “short open” to “10” corresponding to “long open”. In addition, the value of the release number counter is set to “9”. Thus, in the case of “JUB jackpot”, as described above, a maximum of 10 “short releases” are performed in the first round, and “long releases” are performed in the second to tenth rounds, respectively. It will be.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1208, an open end setting process is performed in step U1210, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process of step U1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the hit end flag is turned on.

  If a negative determination is made in step U1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has not reached the specified number, a special prize feed process is performed in step U1211, and this process is performed. finish.

  In the special prize feed process of step U1211, the value of the release number counter is decremented by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. Thus, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

  If a negative determination is made in step U1203, that is, if it is within a predetermined time after completion of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after completion of winning or during an interval between special prize states), the process proceeds to step U1212. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1212, that is, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state and the timing for proceeding to the next process (the start of the next special prize state or the start of the normal game) has been reached. Then, the process proceeds to step U1213. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1212, the present process ends.

  In step U1213, whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or larger than the determination value K2, that is, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 223 in one special prize state is an abnormal number (“13” or “3 It is determined whether or not the number of “pieces” has been reached. The processing function according to step U1213 constitutes an abnormality determination unit in the present embodiment.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1213, the abnormality notification setting process is performed in step U1214, and then the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1213, the process proceeds to step U1215.

  In the abnormality notification setting process in step U1214, a setting process (notification process) for notifying that there is an abnormality (entering error) is performed. For example, in the present embodiment, settings for outputting a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 to the sub-control device 262, settings for outputting an error signal to the hall computer of the game hall, and the like are performed. Based on this, the command is output to the sub-control device 262 in the above-described external output processing of the normal processing, and the sub-control device 262 controls the blinking of the error display lamp 104. The error display lamp 104, the external relay terminal plate 240 that outputs a ball entry error signal, and the like constitute notification means in the present embodiment.

  In step U1215, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit state or the small hit state by referring to the hit end flag.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U1215, a hit end setting process is performed in step U1216, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U1215, the special prize state start process is performed in step U1217, and then this process ends.

  In the hit end setting process in step U1216, the big hit / small hit flag is turned off, the high probability state flag setting process, the time shortening state flag setting process, the high entry state flag setting process, and the variation counter Setting processing, mode switching command setting processing, and the like are performed.

  The high probability state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high probability state. In the high probability state flag setting process, the above-described “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “ Based on the “probability flag” and the “JUB flag”, the high probability state flag is switched. As a result, when the probability variation mode is set after the jackpot is ended (the “probability variation flag”, “surprise probability flag”, or “JUB flag” is on), “1” indicating the occurrence of a high probability state is set as the flag value. When the “time reduction mode” is set (“normal flag” is on), “0” indicating the occurrence of the low probability state is set as the flag value.

  The time reduction state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a time reduction state. In the time reduction state flag setting process, the above-described “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “ Based on the “probability flag” and the “JUB flag”, the time reduction state flag is switched. As a result, when the time reduction state is set after the jackpot is ended (the “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “surprise probability flag”, or “JUB flag” is on), “ “1” is set as the flag value.

  The high entry state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high entry state. In the high entry state flag setting process, the above-described “probability change flag”, “normal flag” ”,“ Probability flag ”, and“ JUB flag ”are set to switch the high pitching state flag. As a result, when the high pitching state is set after the end of the jackpot (the “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “probability flag” or “JUB flag” is on), the high pitching state is generated. “1” shown is set as the flag value.

  The mode determination by the main controller 261 in the present embodiment is performed by a combination of the above-described high probability state flag, time reduction state flag, and high entry state flag on / off state. For example, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitching state flag are all on (flag value “1”), it is determined as “probability change mode”. Further, if the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitching state flag are all in an off state (flag value “0”), it is determined that the mode is “normal mode”. If only the high probability state flag is off and the time shortening state flag and the high pitching state flag are on, it is determined that the time shortening mode is set.

  The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the variation counter setting process, the high probability state flag setting process and Similarly, switching setting of the variation counter is performed based on the “probability change flag” or the like. As a result, when the time reduction mode is set (usually a big hit), “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter.

  Note that the “probability change flag”, “normal flag”, “probability flag”, and “JUB flag” are turned off after the high probability state flag setting process or the like.

  The mode switching command is a command for instructing the sub-control device 262 to switch the game mode (“normal mode”, “probability change mode”, or “time reduction mode”). The command includes mode information related to a new game mode that is grasped by the mode discrimination. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that has received this switches the game mode that it has grasped to a new game mode. Alternatively, the mode switching command may be omitted, and instead of this, for example, the mode information may be included in an ending command or the like that notifies the end of the jackpot state.

  In the special prize state start process of step U1217, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time (“7500” or “100”) corresponding to the opening type is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter Vx is further set. The value of is reset to “0”.

  Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  Next, the second display control process in step U207 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In FIG. 49, in step U2101, the normal symbol display device 41 is in the switching display (variable display) while looking at the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing the variable display. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the display stop state is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step U2101, the process proceeds to step U2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the variable display is not being performed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc> 0, the process proceeds to step U2103. In step U2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step U2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step U2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the second display timer flag is turned on, and the second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Is done. In the present embodiment, in the “normal mode”, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is 2 seconds, “500” is set in the second display timer. In the “probability change mode” and the “time reduction mode”, “100” is set in the second display timer. Based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process, the normal symbol display is performed. Switching display is started in the device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step U2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step U2101, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step U2106 to perform a second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step U2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step U2107, the second display flag is turned off in step U2108, and a normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step U2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation holding area. Specifically, “5-153” is the winning value among the numerical values 0-250 of the normal symbol random number counter C4.

  Then, it progresses to step U2110, a normal symbol discrimination | determination information setting process is performed, and this process is complete | finished. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing the opening / closing process of the start winning unit 33 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on, and the release time is set in the second variable timer.

  The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state.

  The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the start winning unit 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening start. In this embodiment, the opening time of the start winning unit 33 is different between the high pitching state (“probability change mode” and “time reduction mode”) and the low pitching state (“normal mode”), and the high pitching state. In this case, “1000” is set for the second variable timer, and “100” is set for the second variable timer in the low pitching state.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step U2107, in step U2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity handling unit control processing in step U208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step U2201, it is determined whether or not a second variable flag indicating whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state is ON. Here, when it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the start winning unit 33 is in the closed state), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is considered that the start winning unit 33 is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step U2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step U2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the prescribed opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes “0”, the determination at step U2203 is affirmative. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step U2203, the process proceeds to step U2204, and an end setting process is performed in step U2204, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step U2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

  Various control signals are output to the start winning unit 33 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the start winning unit 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the starting winning unit 33 is closed (the opening / closing member 33c is closed). , It is impossible to enter the game ball into the lower winning award 33b).

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step U3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step U3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In the following step U3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, the received command is first read from the command buffer of the RAM 553. Subsequently, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, a return command, a variation pattern command, or a mode switching command.

  Here, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an initialization command, the main control device 261 has instructed initialization of the RAM 553 when the power is turned on. Therefore, the RAM 553 is cleared and the RAM 553 is initialized. Set the value. Thus, mode information (for example, “FF”) corresponding to the “normal mode” that is the initial setting is stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553.

  In addition, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a return command, the main control device 261 returns to the state before power-off, so the sub-control device 262 that does not have a backup function is included in the return command. The mode information (for example, mode information “FD” corresponding to “probability change mode”) is read and stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a variation pattern command, mode information included in the variation pattern command (for example, mode information “FD” corresponding to “probability variation mode”) is read and the mode information Are compared with the mode information stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553. Here, mode information included in the variation pattern command (for example, mode information “FD” corresponding to “probability change mode”) and mode information stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553 (for example, mode information corresponding to “normal mode”). "FF"), and if both mode information is different, the setting process related to mode error notification is performed.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a mode switching command, it is the timing at which the main control device 261 switches the game mode, so the mode information included in the mode switching command (for example, the “probability change mode”). Corresponding mode information “FD”) is read out and stored in the mode information storage area of the RAM 553.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 51, after step U3903 or when a negative determination is made in step U3901, the process proceeds to step U3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step U3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step U3912.

  In step U3905, various counter updating processes are executed. Similar to the first embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative symbols. However, in the present embodiment, the chance symbol that is stopped and displayed in the case of “surprise big hit” or “JUB big hit” is a combination of decorative symbols (“3”, “4”, “1”). For this reason, it is not necessary to use counter information when displaying decorative symbols.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 51, display setting processing is performed in step U3907. In this processing, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed based on information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. More specifically, the sub-control device 262 determines a display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on a table that associates the variation type of the decorative symbol with the variation pattern command, and corresponds to the variation time of the variation pattern command. Set the value to the variable time timer.

  In the display setting process in step U3907, the stop symbol is also determined based on the symbol command. As described above, when “A1” is set in the symbol command, any combination of symbols 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A3” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553 is determined as the stop symbol. When “A4” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely off symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol. When “A6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped. Determine as.

  Furthermore, in the display setting process of step U3907, the mode switching setting process is also performed. The mode switching setting process is a process for setting a display command for causing the display control device 45 to execute a process for performing the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 in a mode corresponding to the type of the game mode.

  The display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is appropriately switched in color tone of the background image according to the game mode based on the mode information stored in the mode information storage area. Specifically, in the “normal mode”, the background image has a colorful full color scheme using a plurality of colors. In the “probability change mode”, the background image has a reddish monotone color scheme, and in the “time reduction mode”, the background image has a greenish second monotone color scheme.

  In the lamp setting process of step U3908, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the audio setting process of step U3909, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice command such as an error notification is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step U3909.

  In step U3910, other processing such as control setting of a waiting-for-waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state in which the decorative symbol display device 42 has not been changed) is performed. Do.

  In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps U3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps U3905 to U3911 performed every 1 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step U3904, the process proceeds to step U3912, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If no power off occurrence information is stored, the process advances to step U3913 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. Here, if the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to the process of step U3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step U3912 that the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is stored, power supply interruption processing is executed in step U3914. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, a game ball (game detected by the count switch 223) that has won the variable winning device 32 during one special prize state (including a predetermined time after the special prize state ends). When the number of balls exceeds the appropriate range, an abnormality notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to early detect and suppress fraudulent acts such as a radio wave attack on the variable winning device 32 without providing a radio wave detection sensor.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a determination value K2 for determining an abnormality in the number of balls entered is determined for each open type (“long open” or “short open”). As a result, it is possible to cope with various hit types while suppressing an increase in the number of data storage, compared to a configuration in which determination values for abnormality determination are stored for various hit types such as big hits and small hits. Can do. Also, without waiting for the end of a special game state such as a big win or a small win, an abnormality determination can be made every time the special prize state ends, and an illegal act can be detected early and consequently suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the opening / closing member 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state, the abnormality determination is performed including the value counted during the closed state (for example, during the interval). When the number of balls detected by the count switch 223 reaches the specified number even if the "radio wave" as described in the above "problems to be solved by the invention" is performed during the open state of the opening / closing member 32a Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32a ends properly. In other words, as a case where the radio wave is performed on the variable winning device 32, there is a high possibility that it is performed while the opening / closing member 32a is in the closed state. In addition, during a predetermined time after the opening / closing member 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state (such as during an interval), the ball is properly entered into the variable winning device 32 just before the opening / closing member 32a is closed, but still detected by the count switch 223. Since it is necessary to wait for detection of an unplayed game ball (remaining ball), the detection process by the count switch 223 cannot be stopped. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to more reliably detect fraudulent acts such as radio waves that are easily performed on the variable winning device 32.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In each of the above-described embodiments, a through-type proximity switch is employed as various ball detection switches such as the prize opening switch 221. The type of the entrance detection switch is not limited to this. For example, another non-contact type switch such as a photo switch or a contact type switch such as a micro switch may be employed. For example, by inserting a wire or the like into the ball detection switch and turning the ball detection switch on and off, the game ball does not actually enter the ball entry means in the same way as “radio wave” etc. If the ball enters the ball, an illegal act of causing the ball detection switch to erroneously detect the ball may be performed. Therefore, the present invention is effective even for the ball detection switch that is not easily affected by radio waves.

  (B) In each of the above-described embodiments, at a normal time when the game ball does not pass through the through hole such as the prize opening switch 221 or the like, a + 12V high level signal (H) is output from the prize opening switch 221 or the like, and the main control device On the 261 side, a low level signal (L) having a reference potential of 0 V is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229. On the other hand, while a game ball enters the general prize opening 31 and the like and the game ball passes through a passage hole such as the prize opening switch 221, a low level signal (L) is output from the prize opening switch 221 and the like. The high level signal (H) is input to the CPU 501 through the inverting circuit 229 on the main controller 261 side.

  For example, the inverting circuit 229 may be omitted, and the signal output from the winning prize switch 221 or the like may be input to the CPU 501 as it is.

  Further, during normal times when the game ball is not passing, a low level signal (L) is output from the prize opening switch 221 and the like, and while the game ball is passing through the passage hole, the high level from the prize opening switch 221 and the like is output. The level signal (H) may be output.

  (C) In each of the above embodiments, when performing the ball entry determination process, the logic inversion process is performed on the earliest data of the latest three data stored in the signal level buffer, and the logic inversion is performed. The logical product of all the remaining data and the remaining two data is calculated, and determination processing is performed based on the calculation result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same processing may be performed based on at least two times of data stored in the signal level buffer. Alternatively, the logical inversion processing of the earliest data may be omitted, and a logical product of data for a plurality of times may be simply calculated.

  (D) In the first embodiment, in detecting the “first radio wave goto”, the number of times that an abnormality is detected such that the detection start interval is 36 msec or less is counted, and the number of times is 50 times. Only when it becomes above, it becomes the structure which notifies an error. The number of conditions for performing error notification is not limited to 50, but may be a different value. Further, the abnormality count counter may be omitted, and an error notification may be provided every time an abnormality is determined to be present.

  In the second embodiment, an error notification is made when an abnormality determination is made once that the number of game balls won in the variable prize winning device 32 exceeds the appropriate range during one special prize state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, provided with an abnormal count counter as an abnormal number storage means capable of storing the number of times determined to be abnormal, and when the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value after the end of the jackpot It may be configured to output a ball entry error signal to the hall computer.

  (E) The elapsed time measuring means is not limited to the abnormality monitoring timer CT in the first embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, a timer for detecting the “first radio wave goto” and a timer for detecting the “second radio goto” may be separately provided. Further, instead of the abnormality monitoring timer CT, for example, one count is added to a predetermined counter every 2 msec period of the switch reading process, and when the value reaches 500, it may be determined that 1 second has elapsed. .

  (F) In each of the embodiments described above, an error notification is provided as a process when an abnormality is detected. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, a process for canceling a determination that there is a ball entry or a game ball A process for canceling the payout control, a process for deleting the hold data, a process for stopping the launch of the game ball, and the like may be performed.

  (G) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from said each embodiment. In addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball can be implemented.

  (H) In each of the above-described embodiments, the error display lamp 104 is caused to emit light as an abnormality notification related to the radio wave, and a ball entry error signal is output from the external relay terminal board 240 to the hall computer of the game hall. . The notification means is not limited to these, and for example, sound generation means such as a speaker SP, various display means such as a decorative symbol display device 42, and the like may be employed.

  (I) In the second embodiment, the arrangement of the jackpot type is different between the case where a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a and the case where a game ball enters the lower winning opening 33b. However, it may be reversed.

  The contents of the jackpot type are not limited to those in the second embodiment. For example, after the jackpot, a jackpot (latency probability changing jackpot) that provides a later-described latent probability changing mode may be provided.

  (J) In the second embodiment, the “normal mode”, the “probability change mode”, and the “time reduction mode” can be set as the game mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another mode may be set. For example, a configuration in which a state in which the high probability mode is assigned is difficult for the player to recognize, that is, a “latency probability variation mode” that is a latent state may be provided.

  Here, the “latent probability change mode” refers to a state (for example, 1/30) in which the jackpot probability after the jackpot is increased as compared with the “probability change mode” compared to the “normal mode”. In addition, the “latency probability change mode” may be continued until the next big hit state occurs, similarly to the “probability change mode”. However, in the “latency probability changing mode”, the jackpot probability is merely increased, and the others are not different from those in the “normal mode” on the surface. In other words, unlike the “probability change mode”, the game display ball is frequently entered into the start winning unit 33 (the lower winning opening 33b) instead of being in a time shortening state in which the variable display time in the special display devices 43L and 43R is short. It will not be a high pitched state where the ball is sphered. That is, the “latency probability changing mode” corresponds to a high probability mode in which a time shortening state and a high pitching state are not added. Therefore, under the second embodiment, when only the high probability state flag is on and the time reduction state flag and the high ball entering state flag are off, it is possible to determine the “latency probability change mode”.

  (K) In the second embodiment, the determination value K2 for determining the abnormality in the number of balls is determined for each opening type (“long opening” or “short opening”) of the opening / closing member 32a. Not limited to this, for example, a determination value for abnormality determination is stored for each hit type (or for each round), and the number of game balls won in a plurality of special prize states is determined at the end of hit (or at the end of each round) It is good also as a structure to determine to.

  In the second embodiment, the number of entered balls is determined to be abnormal every time one special prize state is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which performs abnormality determination of the number of balls. In such a case, for example, the determination value K (for example, “13”) corresponding to the open type (for example, “long open”) of the special prize state and the special prize state executed during a predetermined hit state (or during each round). Based on the determination value (for example, “13 pieces” × “10 times”) obtained by multiplying the number of executions, abnormality determination of the number of balls entered at the end of the hit state (or at the end of each round) It is good also as a structure to perform.

  In the second embodiment, a specified time elapses or a specified number of game balls wins after the open / close member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state in various winning states. For each opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing member 32a, such that one opening / closing operation until the closed state is taken as one special prize state and this is repeated a plurality of times (multiple rounds). A prescribed number K1 that is the maximum expected number of balls to enter the variable winning device 32 is set. For example, in the configuration in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32a is performed a plurality of times during one round, such as the first round of “JUB jackpot”, for example, a prescribed number is set for each round. Also good. In other words, a predetermined number of special award states in which a prescribed number that is the maximum expected number of balls entering the variable winning device 32 is set as one round. Similarly, in the case where “short opening” is set to one special prize state, such as “surprise big hit” or “small win”, a plurality of special prize states (for example, ten times) may be regarded as one round. .

  Hereinafter, another example of the variable winning device control process (see FIG. 48) of step U206 under the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Detailed description of the same components as those in the above embodiment will be omitted.

  First, in step H1201, it is determined whether or not the big hit / medium flag is small. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1201, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the first variable timer in the subsequent step H1202.

  In the subsequent step H1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step H1204.

  In step H1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than a specified number K3. In the predetermined number K3, the maximum expected number of balls for one round is set in the discrimination information setting process (step U816) or the like. For example, “10” is set if “probability big hit” or “normal big hit”. Further, if the first round of “JUB big hit”, “surprise big hit” or “small hit”, “5” is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1204, the process proceeds to step H1205, whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is “0”, that is, one open / close operation (“long open” or “short open” of the open / close member 32a). It is determined whether or not an open time (specified time “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”) remains.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (timing for the end of the special prize state) has not yet arrived, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step H1205, the process proceeds to step H1206.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1204, the process proceeds to step H1220 to determine whether or not the long release flag is on. The long release flag is a flag for determining whether or not the opening / closing operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a is “long open”. If it is, it means that it is “short open”. The long release flag is appropriately set to ON / OFF when the opening / closing operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a is set, such as the determination information setting process (step U816).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1220, the process proceeds to step H1206. If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step H1208.

  In step H1206, the first variable timer and determination value K2 are set.

  Here, the first variable timer includes whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the big win or the small prize, In this embodiment, a value “750” corresponding to “3 seconds” is set to determine whether or not an interval until the special prize state is started.

  The determination value K2 is a value for determining whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 in a single special prize state (including the predetermined time after completion of the special prize state) is appropriate. It is. The determination value K2 is determined in advance for each opening type (operating mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation) such as “long opening” or “short opening”. For example, “13” is set as the determination value K2 if “long open”, and “3” is set as the determination value K2 if “short open”. Note that a determination value determination table (see FIG. 54) as a determination value storage unit that defines the correspondence between the open type and the determination value K2 is stored in the ROM 502, and is referred to when performing such setting processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step H1207, whether or not the counter value of the release number counter is “0”, that is, whether or not the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has reached the prescribed number of 10 times. Determine whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1207, it is determined in step H1208 whether or not the JUB flag is on, thereby determining whether or not the variable winning device control process corresponds to “JUB jackpot”. Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1208, a setting change process is performed in step H1209, and this process ends.

  In the setting change process in step H1209, the specified number K3 is changed from “5” corresponding to 10 “short open” to “10” corresponding to one “long open”. In addition, the value of the release number counter is set to “9”. Further, the long release flag is turned on. Thus, in the case of “JUB jackpot”, as described above, a maximum of 10 “short releases” are performed in the first round, and “long releases” are performed in the second to tenth rounds, respectively. It will be.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1208, an open end setting process is performed in step H1210, and this process ends.

  In the end setting process of step H1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the hit end flag is turned on.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has not reached the specified number of times, a special prize feed process is performed in step H1211, and this process is performed. finish.

  In the special prize feed process of step H1211, the value of the release number counter is decremented by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. Thus, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

  If a negative determination is made in step H1203, that is, if it is within a predetermined time after completion of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after completion of winning or during an interval between special prize states), the process proceeds to step H1212. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1212, that is, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state, and the timing for proceeding to the next process (the start of the next special prize state or the start of the normal game) has been reached. Then, the process proceeds to step H1213. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1212, the present process is terminated as it is.

  In Step H1213, whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or larger than the determination value K2, that is, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 223 in one special prize state is an abnormal number (“13” or “3 It is determined whether or not the number of “pieces” has been reached.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1213, the abnormality notification setting process is performed in step H1214, and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1213, the process proceeds to step H1215.

  In the abnormality notification setting process in step H1214, a setting process (notification process) for notifying that there is an abnormality (entrance error) is performed.

  In Step H1215, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit state or the small hit state with reference to the hit end flag.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step H1215, a hit end setting process is performed in step H1216, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step H1215, the special prize state start process is performed in step H1217, and then this process is terminated.

  In the hit end setting process of step H1216, the big hit / small hit flag is turned off, the high probability state flag setting process, the time shortening state flag setting process, the high pitching state flag setting process, and the variation counter Setting processing, mode switching command setting processing, and the like are performed.

  In the special prize state start process of step H1217, the first variable flag is turned on, the release time (“7500” or “100”) corresponding to the release type is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter Vx The value of is reset to “0”.

  According to the above configuration, the specified number K3 which is the maximum expected number of entries to the variable winning device 32 per round is monitored in round units, whereas the number of entries detected by the count switch 223 is abnormal. The value (determination value K2) is monitored for each special prize state. For this reason, in the case of the first round of “JUB big hit”, “surprise big hit” or “small hit”, the stage before the number of balls detected by the count switch 223 reaches the specified number K3, that is, one round is completed. In the previous stage, it becomes possible to detect an abnormality (ball entry error). As a result, fraud can be detected early.

  Of course, even in the configuration in which the prescribed number that is the maximum expected number of entries to the variable winning device 32 is set in a big hit unit, the abnormal value (determination value K2) of the number of entries detected by the count switch 223 is once. If each special prize state (or round) is monitored, the same effect can be obtained.

  (L) The opening type of the opening / closing member 32a is not limited to the two types of “long opening” and “short opening” in the second embodiment. For example, it may be configured to have three or more types of opening, such as “intermediate opening” having a shorter opening time than “long opening” and longer opening time than “short opening”. Further, for example, a configuration in which the opening / closing operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a is switched in three or more patterns during one hit state such as “JUB big hit” (a configuration in which three or more types of opening are performed) may be employed.

  Further, as a difference in the operation mode of the opening / closing member 32a, not only the prescribed time required for one opening / closing operation is different, but instead of or in addition, for example, the opening angle of the opening / closing member 32a is different (for example, half-opening). The movement itself of the opening / closing member 32a may be different.

  (M) A configuration may be adopted in which a switch reading process different from the switch reading process according to each of the above-described embodiments (see FIGS. 13 and 39) can be executed.

  For example, in the first embodiment, each time the switch reading process is executed, the series of processes in steps S413 to S418 is always executed. However, in order to reduce the processing load, the series of processes is performed. It is good also as a structure which is not performed every time.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 56, after the processing in step S407 is performed, it is determined in step S4071 whether or not the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is “0” or more. That is, it is determined whether or not measurement by the abnormality monitoring timer CT is being executed (including the case where the value of the abnormality monitoring timer CT is “0”). Here, when an affirmative determination is made, the processes of steps S413 to S418 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4071, this processing is terminated as it is.

  (N) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiments, the valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the count switch 223 is valid may be limited to a predetermined time from the start of the special prize state. In this way, it is possible to further suppress “radio waves”.

  Hereinafter, the technical idea that is not described in the claims and that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described together with the effects thereof.

Means 0. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
Entry means arranged in the game area;
An entrance detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered into the entrance means;
By providing an abnormality determination means capable of determining the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality based on the detection result of the entrance detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined abnormality caused by a predetermined radio wave goto can be detected without referring to a detection result of the predetermined radio wave detection means (without providing a radio wave detection means).

  Conventionally, measures such as providing a radio wave detection sensor (radio wave detection means) in the gaming machine are taken in order to prevent the “radio waves” as described in the above “problem to be solved by the invention”.

  However, when it is intended to cover the entire gaming area where a plurality of entrance means are arranged with one radio wave detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor with a wide detection range must be used, and radio waves that are not related to unauthorized radio waves are used. May be detected. On the other hand, when a radio wave detection sensor with a narrow detection range is provided corresponding to each ball entry means, there is a risk of increasing the number of parts, complicating the mounting structure, complicating electrical wiring, and the like.

  On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means 0, it is possible to detect and suppress early acts of fraud such as radio wave goto with respect to the ball entry means without providing a radio wave detection sensor.

Means 1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
Entry means arranged in the game area;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising control means for monitoring the signal output from the entrance detection means and performing predetermined control,
The entrance detection means continuously outputs a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) during non-detection of a game ball, and outputs a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) during detection of a game ball. Output continuously,
The control means includes
A signal monitoring means for periodically monitoring the signal level input from the entrance detection means;
Based on the switching of the signal level input from the entrance detection means, at least entrance determination means capable of determining that a game ball has entered the entrance means,
An elapsed time measuring means capable of measuring an elapsed time from a time when there is a ball entered by the ball entering judging means (when a switching from a first level signal to a second level signal is detected) to a predetermined trigger;
An abnormality determining means capable of determining the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality based on the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means;
A gaming machine comprising: notifying means capable of notifying that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the abnormality determination by the abnormality determining means.

  According to the means 1, the signal level input from the entrance detection means is monitored to make the entrance determination, and the elapsed time from the predetermined entrance presence determination time to the predetermined trigger is measured, and the elapsed time By performing the abnormality determination based on the above, it is possible to appropriately detect a predetermined abnormality such that, for example, a predetermined switching point of the signal level comes at a timing earlier or later than an appropriate time interval. As a result, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as radio wave goats and suppress them without providing a radio wave detection sensor.

  Further, by providing the notifying means, it is possible for a person related to the game hall or the like to know that some abnormality has occurred, such as an illegal act being performed on the incoming ball detecting means. As a result, it leads to early detection of fraud. Examples of the notification means include light emission means such as a lamp, sound generation means such as a speaker, display means, and an external output means such as an external terminal board that outputs a signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

  Examples of the “predetermined opportunity” include “when it is determined that there is a next entry”, “when reaching a predetermined maximum measurement time” of elapsed time measuring means such as a timer, and the like. In addition, as the “predetermined control” performed by the “control means”, for example, payout control of game balls, lottery control for determining whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and display for variably displaying identification information For example, control.

  Further, according to this means, it is possible to perform an appropriate process according to each incoming means as compared with the case where a plurality of incoming means are monitored by one radio wave detection sensor. For example, when it is determined that there is an abnormality with respect to a specific incoming ball detecting means, only processing related to the specific incoming ball detecting means is stopped, so that processing related to other incoming ball detecting means is greatly affected. Without giving, it is also possible to take a measure corresponding only to a specific fraud aimed at a specific entry detecting means. As a result, it is possible to take an appropriate response to various radio waves and efficiently suppress radio waves.

Mean 2. The elapsed time measuring means is configured to be capable of measuring an elapsed time from at least a predetermined entry determination to the next entry determination.
The abnormality determination means is configured to be able to determine that there is an abnormality when at least the elapsed time is shorter than a preset specified time (first specified time),
An abnormality number storage means capable of storing the number of times determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination means;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notification means notifies the fact when the number of times that the abnormality is determined becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

  Generally, when a game ball enters a ball entry means and a second level signal is output, the output time (signal duration) is about several msec to 30 msec at the latest. Also, even if two game balls are entered into the entrance means so as to be connected, from the end of detection of the first entered game ball to the start of detection of the second entered game ball, It takes about 30 msec. Accordingly, the elapsed time from the first time point when it is determined that there is a ball entering the ball entry means to the second time point when it is determined that there is a ball entering the ball entry means is a specified time (for example, 40 msec). If it is extremely short as follows, there is a high possibility that the radio wave has been carried out by the method exemplified in the above “problem to be solved by the invention”.

  However, as described above, even when an abnormality is detected in which the interval between two game balls is less than the specified time, if the number of detections is small (for example, only once) There is also a possibility that the problem is simply an accident due to noise or the like. On the other hand, if a large number of such abnormalities are detected, there is a high possibility of fraud.

  In addition, when the radio wave detection sensor is used, the radio wave detected by the radio wave detection sensor includes many radio waves that are unrelated to the radio wave noise such as radio wave noises emitted from various electronic devices. If uniform processing is performed until such radio noise is detected, it will not be an appropriate countermeasure against radio goto, but will also bring unexpected disadvantages to players unrelated to radio goto There is also a fear.

  In this regard, according to the above-described means 2, it is possible to determine that the radio wave has been performed by the above-described method, and it is possible to suppress the radio wave. Furthermore, accidental factors can be eliminated as much as possible, and the determination accuracy of the radio wave can be improved. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to a true fraud, and the fraud can be efficiently prevented. As a result, it is possible for the game hall to avoid unnecessary troubles with the player, such as not issuing an alarm unnecessarily, and to manage the hall smoothly.

Means 3. The elapsed time measuring means has elapsed from at least a predetermined entry determination to a determination that there is no entry related to the entry determination (when switching from a second level signal to a first level signal is detected). It is configured to be able to measure time (including when it reaches a predetermined maximum measurement time)
The abnormality determining means is configured to be capable of determining that there is an abnormality when at least the elapsed time is longer than a preset second specified time,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the abnormality determining means determines that there is an abnormality, the notification means notifies that fact.

  “Radio Goto” includes, for example, a legitimate act that separates the level signal output based on the detection of a game ball that actually passes through the ball detection means as described above and increases the number of detections. A method using a game ball having a diameter larger than that of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “illegal large ball”) is also conceivable. In such a case, an illegal large sphere is first placed in the ball passage in advance by entering the ball entry means. If it does so, the said illegal large sphere will be in the state caught in the said passage hole, without being able to pass the passage hole of an entrance detection means. As a result, the incoming ball detecting means is always in an ON state (a state in which the second level signal is output) in which an illegal large ball is detected. In this state, by appropriately transmitting an improper radio wave that turns the ball detection means off (the state in which the first level signal is output), the on / off state is switched, even though the game ball has not passed, It can be erroneously detected that a game ball has passed.

  As described above, the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage hole of the entrance detection means (continuous output time of the second level signal) is about several msec to 30 msec at the latest. That is, if the second level signal is continuously output for a second specified time (for example, 1 second) continuously from the time when it is determined that there is a ball entering the ball entry means, There is a high possibility that cheating by a ball is being carried out.

  In this regard, according to the means 3, it is possible to determine that the radio wave using the illegal large sphere has been performed, and it is possible to suppress the radio wave.

  In addition, the radio wave that increases the number of detections by dividing the level signal that is output based on the detection of the game ball that actually passes through the entrance detection means in the previous stage, the game ball actually passes through the entrance detection means Incorrect radio waves must be inserted at the same time, which is difficult to execute. On the other hand, since the method using the illegal sphere at the latter stage is relatively easy to execute, providing a means for suppressing such an illegal act is more effective as a countermeasure against radio waves.

  In addition, since the second specified time necessary for determining an illegal act using an illegal large sphere is relatively long, it is assumed that the signal level is set to determine whether or not the second specified time has been reached. If a configuration is employed in which information is periodically stored and a determination is made based on these level information, the processing burden on the arithmetic processing may become extremely large. On the other hand, if a timer or the like is used as the elapsed time measuring means, the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, the measurement of the “elapsed time from the time of determination of the presence of a predetermined entry to the time of determination of the presence of the next entry” of the means 2 and the entry of the entry of the presence of the entry from the time of determination of the presence of the predetermined entry of the means 3 are made. The configuration can be simplified by measuring the “elapsed time until the determination of the absence of a ball” using a common elapsed time measuring means. The following means 4 etc. are mentioned as an example as a structure which makes an elapsed time measurement means common.

Means 4. The entrance determination means indicates that the detection of the game ball has ended based on the switching of the signal level input from the entrance detection means (switching from the second level signal to the first level signal). It is configured to be able to determine that there is no entry,
The elapsed time measuring means determines that there is a predetermined entry when there is no entry during the measurement of the elapsed time from the predetermined entry presence determination time to the next entry presence determination time. Wait for the specified time (first specified time) to elapse from the time of determination, and finish measuring the elapsed time from the predetermined presence determination to the determination of no entry related to the determination that there is no entry The gaming machine according to means 3, characterized in that:

Means 5. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
A starting pitching means arranged in the gaming area;
Lottery means for performing a winning lottery due to a game ball entering the starting ball entry means;
Variable opening means having an opening / closing member capable of opening and closing, and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
An entrance detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the variable entrance means;
An opening / closing control means capable of executing a predetermined opening / closing operation a predetermined number of times when a winning result is obtained by the winning lottery;
An entrance counting means for counting the number of entrances of the game ball detected by the entrance detection means,
An abnormality determining unit that determines whether or not the number of balls counted by the ball counting unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined determination value, and determines whether there is an abnormality when the number is equal to or greater than the determination value. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the means 5, the predetermined number of abnormalities can be appropriately detected by monitoring (counting) the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means and making an abnormality determination based on the number of balls entered. Can do. As a result, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as radio wave goto with respect to the variable pitching means without any radio wave detection sensor.

  Further, according to this means, it is possible to perform an appropriate process according to the variable entry means as compared with the case where a plurality of entry means are monitored by one radio wave detection sensor. For example, if it is determined that there is an abnormality with respect to the variable pitching means, the processing related to other pitching means is stopped without greatly affecting the processing related to other pitching means, such as stopping only the processing related to the variable pitching means. It is also possible to take measures corresponding only to specific fraud aimed at the ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to the radio wave goto and efficiently suppress the radio wave goto.

  “Radio Goto” includes, for example, a high level separately from the fraud that increases the number of detections by dividing the level signal output based on detecting the game ball that actually passes through the ball detection means as described above. A method using a radio wave transmitter that freely controls on / off of a signal and a low level signal is also conceivable. According to this method, it is possible to erroneously detect that a game ball has entered without actually entering the game ball into the entrance means.

  The radio wave goto performed based on actually entering the game ball into the entrance means in the previous stage must insert an improper radio wave at the timing when the game ball actually passes through the entrance detection means. Difficult to run. On the other hand, the method using the transmitter at the latter stage is relatively easy to execute without actually entering the game ball into the entry means. The provision is more effective as a countermeasure against radio waves.

  In addition, as the “predetermined opening / closing operation”, for example, “after the switching of the opening / closing member from the closed state to the opened state, when the specified time has elapsed, the opening / closing operation is performed once until the closed state”, "Opening / closing that is performed once after a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing member is switched from a closed state to an open state or until a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the entrance detection means. Operation ".

  In the former configuration, a closed state may be adopted when a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the entrance detection means during a predetermined number (1 or 2 or more) of opening / closing operations. Further, the predetermined number of opening / closing operations may be set as one round, and the round may be executed a predetermined number of times (1 or 2 or more).

Means 6. The opening / closing member has a plurality of types (a plurality of patterns) of operation modes of the opening / closing member related to a single opening / closing operation,
6. A gaming machine according to claim 5, further comprising determination value storage means for storing the determination value corresponding to each operation mode of the opening / closing member.

  In recent years, the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means performed when a predetermined winning result is obtained by winning lottery has been diversified. For example, the number of executions of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member, the specified time required for the opening / closing operation, and the like change according to the winning result. In addition, the operation mode of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member may be switched (a plurality of operation modes are performed) during the occurrence of a series of special game states (for example, a 15-round jackpot state). For this reason, for example, in the configuration in which the determination value for abnormality determination is stored for each series of special gaming states (hit types) in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is executed a predetermined number of times, the number of data storage may be enormous. There is.

  In this regard, like the present means 6, by storing the determination value for abnormality determination corresponding to each operation mode of the opening / closing member, an increase in the number of stored data can be suppressed.

  In addition, an abnormality determination is made each time the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is completed without waiting for the end of each special game state such as a big win or small win, or each round or special prize state executed during the special game state. It is possible to detect fraud early and to suppress it.

  In addition, as a difference in the operation | movement aspect of an opening / closing member, for example, the regulation time required for one opening / closing operation | movement differs.

  Mean 7 The abnormality determination means includes the number of balls counted by the ball counting means within a predetermined time (such as during an interval) after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the opening / closing member is in the open state. Within a predetermined period of time (for example, within a period from the start of the first opening of the opening / closing member to the start of the second opening or within a period in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed a plurality of times). The gaming machine according to claim 5 or 6, wherein it is determined whether or not the number of balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined determination value, and if it is equal to or greater than the determination value, an abnormality is determined.

  When the number of balls detected by the ball-entry detecting means reaches a specified number, no matter how much the radio wave go is performed while the opening / closing member is open, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is properly terminated. In other words, as a case where the above illegal action is performed on the variable pitching means, there is a high possibility that it is performed while the opening / closing member is in the closed state. Further, during a predetermined time after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state (during an interval, etc.), the ball enters the variable ball entry means properly just before the opening / closing member is closed, but is still detected by the ball entry detection means. Since it is necessary to wait for detection of an unoccupied game ball (remaining ball), the detection process by the incoming ball detection means cannot be stopped. Therefore, the configuration of the means 7 is more effective.

  In view of this, “the abnormality determining unit determines in advance the number of balls counted by the ball counting unit within a predetermined time (such as during an interval) after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state. A determination is made whether there is an abnormality when it is greater than or equal to the determination value, and an effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the entrance detection means is valid is set. In the configuration, the abnormality determination means counts by the entrance counting means within a predetermined time after the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state and after the effective period of the entrance detection means has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the number of entered balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined determination value, and if it is equal to or greater than the determination value, a determination is made that there is an abnormality. .

  Means 8. 8. The gaming machine according to any one of means 5 to 7, further comprising an informing means capable of informing that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on an abnormality determination by the abnormality determining means.

  According to the above means 8, by providing the notifying means, it is possible for a person related to the game hall or the like to know that some abnormality has occurred, such as an illegal act being performed on the variable pitching means. As a result, it leads to early detection of fraud. Examples of the notification means include light emission means such as a lamp, sound generation means such as a speaker, display means, and an external output means such as an external terminal board that outputs a signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

Means 9. An abnormality number storage means capable of storing the number of times determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination means;
9. The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the notification means notifies the fact when the number of times determined to be abnormal is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

  Even when an abnormality is detected, if the number of detections is small (for example, only once), there is a possibility that it is not an illegal act but an accidental entry. On the other hand, if a large number of such abnormalities are detected, there is a high possibility of fraud.

  In addition, when the radio wave detection sensor is used, the radio wave detected by the radio wave detection sensor includes many radio waves that are unrelated to the radio wave noise such as radio wave noises emitted from various electronic devices. If uniform processing is performed until such radio noise is detected, it will not be an appropriate countermeasure against radio goto, but will also bring unexpected disadvantages to players unrelated to radio goto There is also a fear.

  In this regard, according to the means 9, it is possible to determine that the radio wave has been performed by the above exemplified method, and it is possible to suppress the radio wave. Furthermore, accidental factors can be eliminated as much as possible, and the determination accuracy of the radio wave can be improved. As a result, it is possible to take a more appropriate response to a true fraud, and the fraud can be efficiently prevented. As a result, it is possible for the game hall to avoid unnecessary troubles with the player, such as not issuing an alarm unnecessarily, and to manage the hall smoothly.

  Means 10. 10. The means according to any one of means 1 to 9, wherein the entrance detection means is capable of detecting the passage of the game ball based on a change in magnetic flux accompanying the passage of the game ball (for example, a proximity switch). Game machines.

  Means 11. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a ball and ball gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 221 ... Winner opening switch, 223 ... Count switch, 224a, 224b ... First trigger corresponding unit switch, 225 ... Second trigger corresponding port switch, 104 ... Error indication lamp, 240 ... External relay terminal board, 261 ... Main controller, CT ... Abnormality monitoring timer.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
Entry means arranged in the game area;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising control means for monitoring the signal output from the entrance detection means and performing predetermined control,
The incoming ball detection means continuously outputs a first level signal during non-detection of a game ball, and continuously outputs a second level signal during detection of a game ball,
The control means includes
A signal monitoring means for periodically monitoring the signal level input from the entrance detection means;
Based on the switching of the signal level input from the entrance detection means, at least entrance determination means capable of determining that a game ball has entered the entrance means,
An elapsed time measuring means capable of measuring an elapsed time from the time when there is an entry by the entry determining means to a predetermined opportunity;
An abnormality determining means capable of determining the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality based on the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means;
A gaming machine comprising: notifying means capable of notifying that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the abnormality determination by the abnormality determining means.

Images